Document that ispell works, and mention Eshell as an alternative
[bpt/emacs.git] / etc / NEWS
CommitLineData
d874e913 1GNU Emacs NEWS -- history of user-visible changes. 2000-08-14
424d8b44 2Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
3See the end for copying conditions.
4
5Please send Emacs bug reports to bug-gnu-emacs@gnu.org.
3787e12e 6For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
7
8\f
251584f3
DL
9* Installation Changes in Emacs 21.1
10
f4988be7
GM
11** Support for GNU/Linux on IA64 machines has been added.
12
424d8b44
DL
13** Support for LynxOS has been added.
14
1fa28578
GM
15** `movemail' defaults to supporting POP. You can turn this off using
16the --without-pop configure option, should that be necessary.
17
18** There are new configure options associated with the support for
163ea954
RS
19images and toolkit scrollbars. Use the --help option in `configure'
20to list them.
6344985d 21
d5483ab1 22** There is a new configure option `--without-xim' that instructs
d874e913 23Emacs to not use X Input Methods (XIM), if these are available.
5ed8d5af
DL
24
25** There is a new configure option `--disable-largefile' to omit
26Unix-98-style support for large files if that is available.
27
28** You can build a 64-bit Emacs for SPARC/Solaris systems which
29support 64-bit executables. See etc/MACHINES for instructions.
f4988be7 30
1fa28578
GM
31\f
32* Changes in Emacs 21.1
33
83b6997f
GM
34* When an error is signaled during the loading of the user's init
35file, Emacs now pops up the *Messages* buffer.
36
d7b38c05 37** Polish and German translations of Emacs' reference card have been
6917e6bb 38added. They are named `pl-refcard.tex' and `de-refcard.tex'.
d7b38c05
GM
39Postscript files are included.
40
41** A reference card for Dired has been added. Its name is
42`dired-ref.tex'.
43
25ad1371
GM
44** The new variable `auto-mode-interpreter-regexp' contains a regular
45expression matching interpreters, for file mode determination.
46
47This regular expression is matched against the first line of a file to
48determine the file's mode in `set-auto-mode' when Emacs can't deduce a
49mode from the file's name. If it matches, the file is assumed to be
50interpreted by the interpreter matched by the second group of the
51regular expression. The mode is then determined as the mode
52associated with that interpreter in `interpreter-mode-alist'.
53
424d8b44 54+++
f0298744
DL
55** C-down-mouse-3 is bound differently. Now if the menu bar is not
56displayed it pops up a menu containing the items which would be on the
57menu bar. If the menu bar is displayed, it pops up the major mode
58menu or the Edit menu if there is no major mode menu.
59
9a8d84ca
DL
60** Variable `load-path' is no longer customizable because it contains
61a version-dependent component.
62
d76c03ea
GM
63** The <delete> function key is now bound to `delete-char' by default.
64Note that this takes effect only on window systems. On TTYs, Emacs
65will receive ASCII 127 when the DEL key is pressed. This
66character is still bound as before.
67
3b4fa1b2
DL
68** Item Save Options on the Options menu allows saving options set
69using that menu.
70
40e857ea 71** New function executable-make-buffer-file-executable-if-script-p is
424d8b44 72suitable as an after-save-hook as an alternative to `executable-chmod'.
40e857ea 73
beb2eb00 74+++
c08398de
DL
75** The most preferred coding-system is now used to save a buffer if
76buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and it is safe for the buffer
77contents. (The most preferred is set by set-language-environment or
78by M-x prefer-coding-system.) Thus if you visit an ASCII file and
79insert a non-ASCII character from your current language environment,
80the file will be saved silently with the appropriate coding.
81Previously you would be prompted for a safe coding system.
82
db7a3ede 83+++
3d6cd763
GM
84** New variable `inhibit-iso-escape-detection' determines if Emacs'
85coding system detection algorithm should pay attention to ISO2022's
86escape sequences. If this variable is non-nil, the algorithm ignores
87such escape sequences. The default value is nil, and it is
88recommended not to change it except for the special case that you
07b14857 89always want to read any escape code verbatim. If you just want to
3d6cd763 90read a specific file without decoding escape codes, use C-x RET c
07b14857
KH
91(`universal-coding-system-argument'). For instance, C-x RET c latin-1
92RET C-x C-f filename RET.
26ae8525 93
0b8a3a6d
DL
94** Variable `default-korean-keyboard' is initialized properly from the
95environment variable `HANGUL_KEYBOARD_TYPE'.
96
424d8b44 97+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
98** C-u C-x = provides detailed information about the character at
99point in a pop-up window.
100
6d35b49f 101+++
0b8a3a6d
DL
102** New command M-x list-charset-chars reads a character set name and
103displays all characters in that character set.
104
105** M-x set-terminal-coding-system (C-x RET t) now allows CCL-based
106coding systems such as cpXXX and cyrillic-koi8.
107
a4067978 108+++
5cb6a58e 109** M-; now calls comment-dwim which tries to do something clever based
a4067978
EZ
110on the context. M-x kill-comment is now an alias to comment-kill,
111defined on newcomment.el.
5cb6a58e 112
424d8b44 113+++
a1b8d58b
GM
114** The function `getenv' is now callable interactively.
115
6e417ca5
DL
116** The many obsolete language `setup-...-environment' commands have
117been removed -- use `set-language-environment'.
118
424d8b44 119+++
5898e075
DL
120** New user options `display-time-mail-face' and
121`display-time-use-mail-icon' control the appearance of mode-line mail
122indicator used by the display-time package. On a suitable display the
123indicator can be an icon and is mouse-sensitive.
124
424d8b44 125+++
abfcc168
GM
126** Emacs' auto-save list files are now by default stored in a
127sub-directory `.emacs.d/auto-save-list/' of the user's home directory.
874d1079 128(On MS-DOS, this subdirectory's name is `_emacs.d/auto-save.list/'.)
abfcc168
GM
129You can customize `auto-save-list-prefix' to change this location.
130
424d8b44 131+++
cc181e95
GM
132** On window-systems, additional space can be put between text lines
133on the display using several methods
134
424d8b44 135+++
cc181e95
GM
136- By setting frame parameter `line-spacing' to PIXELS. PIXELS must be
137a positive integer, and specifies that PIXELS number of pixels should
138be put below text lines on the affected frame or frames.
139
424d8b44 140+++
cc181e95
GM
141- By setting X resource `lineSpacing', class `LineSpacing'. This is
142equivalent ot specifying the frame parameter.
143
da4496b6 144- By specifying `--line-spacing=N' or `-lsp N' on the command line.
cc181e95
GM
145
146- By setting buffer-local variable `line-spacing'. The meaning is
147the same, but applies to the a particular buffer only.
148
424d8b44 149+++
3b4fa1b2 150** The new command `clone-indirect-buffer' can be used to create
1c459486 151an indirect buffer that is a twin copy of the current buffer. The
3b4fa1b2 152command `clone-indirect-buffer-other-window', bound to C-x 4 c,
1c459486 153does the same but displays the indirect buffer in another window.
0daee095 154
424d8b44 155+++
176256a1 156** New user options `backup-directory-alist' and
3bbc50af
DL
157`make-backup-file-name-function' control the placement of backups,
158typically in a single directory or in an invisible sub-directory.
176256a1 159
dd0add8e
DL
160** New commands iso-iso2sgml and iso-sgml2iso convert between Latin-1
161characters and the corresponding SGML (HTML) entities.
162
bf3ba9ac 163+++
699238d9
GM
164** Emacs now refuses to load compiled Lisp files which weren't
165compiled with Emacs. Set `load-dangerous-libraries' to t to change
166this behavior.
167
168The reason for this change is an incompatible change in XEmacs' byte
169compiler. Files compiled with XEmacs can contain byte codes that let
170Emacs dump core.
171
424d8b44 172+++
699238d9 173** New X resources recognized
100b3cbb 174
7233c5bd
GM
175*** The X resource `synchronous', class `Synchronous', specifies
176whether Emacs should run in synchronous mode. Synchronous mode
177is useful for debugging X problems.
178
179Example:
180
699238d9 181 emacs.synchronous: true
7233c5bd 182
100b3cbb
GM
183*** The X resource `visualClass, class `VisualClass', specifies the
184visual Emacs should use. The resource's value should be a string of
185the form `CLASS-DEPTH', where CLASS is the name of the visual class,
186and DEPTH is the requested color depth as a decimal number. Valid
187visual class names are
188
189 TrueColor
190 PseudoColor
191 DirectColor
192 StaticColor
193 GrayScale
194 StaticGray
195
196Visual class names specified as X resource are case-insensitive, i.e.
197`pseudocolor', `Pseudocolor' and `PseudoColor' all have the same
198meaning.
199
200The program `xdpyinfo' can be used to list the visual classes
201supported on your display, and which depths they have. If
202`visualClass' is not specified, Emacs uses the display's default
203visual.
204
205Example:
206
699238d9 207 emacs.visualClass: TrueColor-8
100b3cbb
GM
208
209*** The X resource `privateColormap', class `PrivateColormap',
210specifies that Emacs should use a private colormap if it is using the
211default visual, and that visual is of class PseudoColor. Recognized
212resource values are `true' or `on'.
213
214Example:
215
699238d9 216 emacs.privateColormap: true
100b3cbb 217
0d0c76b8
EZ
218** The menu bar configuration has changed. The new configuration is
219more CUA-compliant. The most significant change is that Options is
220now a separate menu-bar item, with Mule and Customize as its submenus.
221
42088c12 222** User-option `show-cursor-in-non-selected-windows' controls how to
c60ea02e 223display the cursor in non-selected windows. If nil, no cursor is
42088c12
GM
224shown, if non-nil a hollow box cursor is shown. This option can
225be customized.
c60ea02e 226
424d8b44 227+++
31047e0d
DL
228** The variable `echo-keystrokes' may now have a floating point value.
229
424d8b44 230+++
b02786f9
GM
231** C-x 5 1 runs the new command delete-other-frames which deletes
232all frames except the selected one.
233
3261c1d8
DL
234** If your init file is compiled (.emacs.elc), `user-init-file' is set
235to the source name (.emacs.el), if that exists, after loading it.
236
ffe36136 237** The help string specified for a menu-item whose definition contains
aa78a4f3
EZ
238the property `:help HELP' is now displayed under X, on MS-Windows, and
239MS-DOS, either in the echo area or with tooltips. Many standard menus
240displayed by Emacs now have help strings.
241
0292b49f 242+++
aa78a4f3
EZ
243** Highlighting of mouse-sensitive regions is now supported in the
244MS-DOS version of Emacs.
ffe36136 245
559cee90
DL
246** New user option `read-mail-command' specifies a command to use to
247read mail from the menu etc.
248
480b5773 249+++
271b4185
GM
250** Hexl contains a new command `hexl-insert-hex-string' which inserts
251a string of hexadecimal numbers read from the mini-buffer.
252
0daee095
GM
253** Changes in Texinfo mode.
254
255** A couple of new key bindings have been added for inserting Texinfo
256macros
257
258 Key binding Macro
259 -------------------------
260 C-c C-c C-s @strong
261 C-c C-c C-e @emph
262 C-c C-c u @url
263 C-c C-c q @quotation
264 C-c C-c m @email
265
559cee90
DL
266** Changes in Outline mode.
267
268There is now support for Imenu to index headings. A new command
269`outline-headers-as-kill' copies the visible headings in the region to
270the kill ring, e.g. to produce a table of contents.
271
7a912f63
GM
272** Changes to Emacs Server
273
c0a8c108
EZ
274+++
275*** The new option `server-kill-new-buffers' specifies what to do
7a912f63
GM
276with buffers when done with them. If non-nil, the default, buffers
277are killed, unless they were already present before visiting them with
278Emacs Server. If nil, `server-temp-file-regexp' specifies which
279buffers to kill, as before.
280
281Please note that only buffers are killed that still have a client,
c0a8c108 282i.e. buffers visited with `emacsclient --no-wait' are never killed in
7a912f63
GM
283this way.
284
956777b3
GM
285** Changes to Show Paren mode.
286
287*** Overlays used by Show Paren mode now use a priority property.
288The new user option show-paren-priority specifies the priority to
289use. Default is 1000.
290
f6989277 291+++
404fa7d6
DL
292** New command M-x check-parens can be used to find unbalanced paren
293groups and strings in buffers in Lisp mode (or other modes).
294
424d8b44
DL
295+++
296** You can now easily create new *Info* buffers using either
297M-x clone-buffer, C-u m <entry> RET or C-u g <entry> RET.
298M-x clone-buffer can also be used on *Help* and several other special
299buffers.
8964fec7 300
424d8b44 301+++
39783d73
WP
302** Emacs can now support 'wheeled' mice (such as the MS IntelliMouse)
303under XFree86. To enable this, simply put (mwheel-install) in your
304.emacs file.
305
306The variables `mwheel-follow-mouse' and `mwheel-scroll-amount'
307determine where and by how much buffers are scrolled.
308
d35fce81
GM
309** Listing buffers with M-x list-buffers (C-x C-b) now shows
310abbreviated file names. Abbreviations can be customized by changing
311`directory-abbrev-alist'.
312
a933dad1
DL
313** Faces and frame parameters.
314
315There are four new faces `scroll-bar', `border', `cursor' and `mouse'.
316Setting the frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
317`scroll-bar-background' sets foreground and background color of face
318`scroll-bar' and vice versa. Setting frame parameter `border-color'
319sets the background color of face `border' and vice versa. Likewise
320for frame parameters `cursor-color' and face `cursor', and frame
321parameter `mouse-color' and face `mouse'.
322
323Changing frame parameter `font' sets font-related attributes of the
324`default' face and vice versa. Setting frame parameters
79214ddf 325`foreground-color' or `background-color' sets the colors of the
a933dad1
DL
326`default' face and vice versa.
327
d80061fa 328+++
f77a4a8a
GM
329** New face `menu'.
330
331The face `menu' can be used to change colors and font of Emacs' menus.
332Setting the font of LessTif/Motif menus is currently not supported;
333attempts to set the font are ignored in this case.
334
424d8b44 335+++
a933dad1
DL
336** New frame parameter `screen-gamma' for gamma correction.
337
338The new frame parameter `screen-gamma' specifies gamma-correction for
339colors. Its value may be nil, the default, in which case no gamma
340correction occurs, or a number > 0, usually a float, that specifies
341the screen gamma of a frame's display.
342
343PC monitors usually have a screen gamma of 2.2. smaller values result
344in darker colors. You might want to try a screen gamma of 1.5 for LCD
345color displays. The viewing gamma Emacs uses is 0.4545. (1/2.2).
346
347The X resource name of this parameter is `screenGamma', class
348`ScreenGamma'.
349
350** Emacs has a new redisplay engine.
351
352The new redisplay handles characters of variable width and height.
353Italic text can be used without redisplay problems. Fonts containing
354oversized characters, i.e. characters larger than the logical height
355of a font can be used. Images of various formats can be displayed in
356the text.
357
358** Emacs has a new face implementation.
359
360The new faces no longer fundamentally use X font names to specify the
361font. Instead, each face has several independent attributes--family,
362height, width, weight and slant--that it may or may not specify.
363These attributes can be merged from various faces, and then together
364specify a font.
365
366Faces are supported on terminals that can display color or fonts.
367These terminal capabilities are auto-detected. Details can be found
368under Lisp changes, below.
369
370** New default font is Courier 12pt.
371
424d8b44
DL
372+++
373** When using a windowing terminal, each Emacs window now has a cursor
374of its own. When the window is selected, the cursor is solid;
375otherwise, it is hollow.
a933dad1
DL
376
377** Bitmap areas to the left and right of windows are used to display
378truncation marks, continuation marks, overlay arrows and alike. The
379foreground, background, and stipple of these areas can be changed by
380customizing face `fringe'.
381
382** The mode line under X is now drawn with shadows by default. You
383can change its appearance by modifying the face `modeline'.
384
385** LessTif support.
386
424d8b44
DL
387Emacs now runs with the LessTif toolkit (see <http://www.lesstif.org>).
388You will need a version 0.88.1 or later.
a933dad1
DL
389
390** Toolkit scroll bars.
391
392Emacs now uses toolkit scrollbars if available. When configured for
393LessTif/Motif, it will use that toolkit's scrollbar. Otherwise, when
394configured for Lucid and Athena widgets, it will use the Xaw3d scroll
395bar if Xaw3d is available. You can turn off the use of toolkit scroll
396bars by specifying `--with-toolkit-scroll-bars=no' when configuring
397Emacs.
398
399When you encounter problems with the Xaw3d scroll bar, watch out how
400Xaw3d is compiled on your system. If the Makefile generated from
401Xaw3d's Imakefile contains a `-DNARROWPROTO' compiler option, and your
402Emacs system configuration file `s/your-system.h' does not contain a
403define for NARROWPROTO, you might consider adding it. Take
404`s/freebsd.h' as an example.
405
406Alternatively, if you don't have access to the Xaw3d source code, take
407a look at your system's imake configuration file, for example in the
408directory `/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/config' (paths are different on
409different systems). You will find files `*.cf' there. If your
410system's cf-file contains a line like `#define NeedWidePrototypes NO',
411add a `#define NARROWPROTO' to your Emacs system configuration file.
412
413The reason for this is that one Xaw3d function uses `double' or
414`float' function parameters depending on the setting of NARROWPROTO.
415This is not a problem when Imakefiles are used because each system's
416image configuration file contains the necessary information. Since
417Emacs doesn't use imake, this has do be done manually.
418
419** Toggle buttons and radio buttons in menus.
420
421When compiled with LessTif (or Motif) support, Emacs uses toolkit
422widgets for radio and toggle buttons in menus. When configured for
423Lucid, Emacs draws radio buttons and toggle buttons similar to Motif.
424
424d8b44 425+++
a933dad1
DL
426** Highlighting of trailing whitespace.
427
428When `show-trailing-whitespace' is non-nil, Emacs displays trailing
429whitespace in the face `trailing-whitespace'. Trailing whitespace is
430defined as spaces or tabs at the end of a line. To avoid busy
431highlighting when entering new text, trailing whitespace is not
432displayed if point is at the end of the line containing the
433whitespace.
434
6e612d4d 435+++
a933dad1
DL
436** Busy-cursor.
437
438Emacs can optionally display a busy-cursor under X. You can turn the
439display on or off by customizing group `cursor'.
440
424d8b44 441+++
a933dad1
DL
442** Blinking cursor
443
444M-x blink-cursor-mode toggles a blinking cursor under X and on
445terminals having terminal capabilities `vi', `vs', and `ve'. Blinking
446and related parameters like frequency and delay can be customized in
447the group `cursor'.
448
449** New font-lock support mode `jit-lock-mode'.
450
451This support mode is roughly equivalent to `lazy-lock' but is
452generally faster. It supports stealth and deferred fontification.
453See the documentation of the function `jit-lock-mode' for more
454details.
455
456Font-lock uses jit-lock-mode as default support mode, so you don't
457have to do anything to activate it.
458
459** Tabs and variable-width text.
460
461Tabs are now displayed with stretch properties; the width of a tab is
462defined as a multiple of the normal character width of a frame, and is
463independent of the fonts used in the text where the tab appears.
464Thus, tabs can be used to line up text in different fonts.
465
466** Enhancements of the Lucid menu bar
467
424d8b44 468+++
a933dad1
DL
469*** The Lucid menu bar now supports the resource "margin".
470
471 emacs.pane.menubar.margin: 5
472
79dd1637
RS
473The default margin is 4 which makes the menu bar appear like the
474LessTif/Motif one.
a933dad1 475
79dd1637
RS
476*** Arrows that indicate sub-menus are now drawn with shadows, as in
477LessTif and Motif.
a933dad1 478
34d90e29 479+++
a933dad1
DL
480** Hscrolling in C code.
481
cc181e95
GM
482Horizontal scrolling now happens automatically if
483`automatic-hscrolling' is set (the default). This setting can be
484customized.
a933dad1
DL
485
486** Tool bar support.
487
488Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. For details
489how to define a tool bar, see the page describing Lisp-level changes.
490
424d8b44 491+++
a933dad1
DL
492** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
493
494Different parts of the mode line under X have been made
495mouse-sensitive. Moving the mouse to a mouse-sensitive part in the mode
496line changes the appearance of the mouse pointer to an arrow, and help
497about available mouse actions is displayed either in the echo area, or
498in the tooltip window if you have enabled one.
499
500Currently, the following actions have been defined:
501
502- Mouse-1 on the buffer name in the mode line switches between two
503buffers.
504
505- Mouse-2 on the buffer-name switches to the next buffer, and
506M-mouse-2 switches to the previous buffer in the buffer list.
507
508- Mouse-3 on the buffer-name displays a buffer menu.
509
424d8b44
DL
510- Mouse-2 on the read-only or modified status in the mode line (`%' or
511`*') toggles the status.
a933dad1
DL
512
513- Mouse-3 on the mode name display a minor-mode menu.
514
515** LessTif/Motif file selection dialog.
516
517When Emacs is configured to use LessTif or Motif, reading a file name
e33b0397 518from a menu will pop up a file selection dialog if `use-dialog-box' is
a933dad1
DL
519non-nil.
520
521** Emacs can display faces on TTY frames.
522
523Emacs automatically detects terminals that are able to display colors.
524Faces with a weight greater than normal are displayed extra-bright, if
525the terminal supports it. Faces with a weight less than normal and
526italic faces are displayed dimmed, if the terminal supports it.
527Underlined faces are displayed underlined if possible. Other face
163ea954
RS
528attributes such as `overline', `strike-through', and `box' are ignored
529on terminals.
a933dad1
DL
530
531** Sound support
532
2f516940 533Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and FreeBSD (Voxware
0b50c67f 534driver and native BSD driver, a.k.a. Luigi's driver). Currently
2f516940 535supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio (*.au).
a933dad1 536
424d8b44 537+++
a933dad1
DL
538** A new variable, backup-by-copying-when-privileged-mismatch, gives
539the highest file uid for which backup-by-copying-when-mismatch will be
540forced on. The assumption is that uids less than or equal to this
541value are special uids (root, bin, daemon, etc.--not real system
542users) and that files owned by these users should not change ownership,
543even if your system policy allows users other than root to edit them.
544
545The default is 200; set the variable to nil to disable the feature.
546
0e18b431 547+++
a933dad1
DL
548** A block cursor can be drawn as wide as the glyph under it under X.
549
550As an example: if a block cursor is over a tab character, it will be
551drawn as wide as that tab on the display. To do this, set
552`x-stretch-cursor' to a non-nil value.
553
fdd8bb68 554+++
a933dad1
DL
555** Empty display lines at the end of a buffer may be marked with a
556bitmap (this is similar to the tilde displayed by vi).
557
558This behavior is activated by setting the buffer-local variable
559`indicate-empty-lines' to a non-nil value. The default value of this
560variable is found in `default-indicate-empty-lines'.
561
562** There is a new "aggressive" scrolling method.
563
564When scrolling up because point is above the window start, if the
565value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-up-aggessively' is a
566number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
567fraction of the window's height from the bottom of the window.
568
569When scrolling down because point is below the window end, if the
570value of the buffer-local variable `scroll-down-aggessively' is a
571number, Emacs chooses a new window start so that point ends up that
572fraction of the window's height from the top of the window.
573
574** The rectangle commands now avoid inserting undesirable spaces,
575notably at the end of lines.
576
577All these functions have been rewritten to avoid inserting unwanted
578spaces, and an optional prefix now allows them to behave the old way.
579
424d8b44 580+++
eee54b0e
DL
581There is a new command M-x replace-rectangle.
582
a933dad1
DL
583** The new command M-x query-replace-regexp-eval acts like
584query-replace-regexp, but takes a Lisp expression which is evaluated
585after each match to get the replacement text.
586
00782214 587+++
d5483ab1
GM
588** M-x query-replace recognizes a new command `e' (or `E') that lets
589you edit the replacement string.
4ff40dd0 590
424d8b44 591** The new command mail-abbrev-complete-alias, bound to `M-TAB', lets
4ff40dd0
GM
592you complete mail aliases in the text, analogous to
593lisp-complete-symbol.
594
7af69644 595+++
a933dad1
DL
596** Emacs now resizes mini-windows if appropriate.
597
163ea954
RS
598If a message is longer than one line, or minibuffer contents are
599longer than one line, Emacs now resizes the minibuffer window unless
600it is on a frame of its own. You can control the maximum minibuffer
601window size by setting the following variable:
a933dad1
DL
602
603- User option: max-mini-window-height
604
605Maximum height for resizing mini-windows. If a float, it specifies a
606fraction of the mini-window frame's height. If an integer, it
607specifies a number of lines. If nil, don't resize.
608
609Default is 0.25.
610
2f72fd2f
GM
611** The command `Info-search' now uses a search history.
612
0d43b60d
GM
613** Changes to hideshow.el
614
615Hideshow is now at version 5.x. It uses a new algorithms for block
616selection and traversal and includes more isearch support.
617
618*** Generalized block selection and traversal
619
620A block is now recognized by three things: its start and end regexps
621(both strings), and a match-data selector (an integer) specifying
622which sub-expression in the start regexp serves as the place where a
623`forward-sexp'-like function can operate. Hideshow always adjusts
624point to this sub-expression before calling `hs-forward-sexp-func'
625(which for most modes evaluates to `forward-sexp').
626
627If the match-data selector is not specified, it defaults to zero,
628i.e., the entire start regexp is valid, w/ no prefix. This is
629backwards compatible with previous versions of hideshow. Please see
630the docstring for variable `hs-special-modes-alist' for details.
631
632*** Isearch support for updating mode line
633
634During incremental search, if Hideshow minor mode is active, hidden
635blocks are temporarily shown. The variable `hs-headline' records the
636line at the beginning of the opened block (preceding the hidden
637portion of the buffer), and the mode line is refreshed. When a block
638is re-hidden, the variable is set to nil.
639
640To show `hs-headline' in the mode line, you may wish to include
641something like this in your .emacs.
642
643 (add-hook 'hs-minor-mode-hook
644 (lambda ()
645 (add-to-list 'mode-line-format 'hs-headline)))
646
559cee90
DL
647** Changes to Change Log mode and Add-Log functions
648
424d8b44 649+++
559cee90
DL
650If you invoke `add-change-log-entry' from a backup file, it makes an
651entry appropriate for the file's parent. This is useful for making
652log entries by comparing a version with deleted functions.
653
424d8b44 654+++
559cee90 655New command M-x change-log-merge merges another log into the current
424d8b44
DL
656buffer.
657
658+++
659New command M-x change-log-redate fixes any old-style date entries in
660a log file.
eb2aac9d 661
502004be 662+++
eb2aac9d
GM
663Change Log mode now adds a file's version number to change log entries
664if user-option `change-log-version-info-enabled' is non-nil.
665
502004be 666+++
424d8b44
DL
667Unless the file is under version control the search for a file's
668version number is performed based on regular expressions from
669`change-log-version-number-regexp-list' which can be cutomized.
670Version numbers are only found in the first 10 percent of a file.
eb2aac9d 671
3476b54a
GM
672** Changes in Font Lock
673
674*** The new function `font-lock-remove-keywords' can be used to remove
675font-lock keywords from the current buffer or from a specific major
676mode.
677
b3b98592
GM
678** Comint (subshell) changes
679
66b6c480
MB
680By default, comint no longer uses the variable `comint-prompt-regexp' to
681distiguish prompts from user-input. Instead, it notices which parts of
682the text were output by the process, and which entered by the user, and
683attaches `field' properties to allow emacs commands to use this information.
684Common movement commands, notably beginning-of-line, respect field
685boundaries in a fairly natural manner.
686To disable this feature, and use the old behavior, set the variable
687`comint-use-prompt-regexp-instead-of-fields' to a non-nil value.
688
b3b98592
GM
689Comint now includes new features to send commands to running processes
690and redirect the output to a designated buffer or buffers.
691
692The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command reads a command and
693buffer name from the mini-buffer. The command is sent to the current
694buffer's process, and its output is inserted into the specified buffer.
695
696The command M-x comint-redirect-send-command-to-process acts like
697M-x comint-redirect-send-command but additionally reads the name of
698the buffer whose process should be used from the mini-buffer.
699
8c1bec7c
MB
700Packages based on comint.el like shell-mode, and scheme-interaction-mode
701now highlight user input and program prompts, and support choosing
702previous input with mouse-2. To control these feature, see the
703user-options `comint-highlight-input' and `comint-highlight-prompt'.
31fc5d15 704
e26cec67
GM
705** Changes to Rmail mode
706
c0510d27
GM
707*** The new user-option rmail-rmail-user-mail-address-regexp can be
708set to fine tune the identification of of the correspondent when
709receiving new mail. If it matches the address of the sender, the
710recipient is taken as correspondent of a mail. If nil, the default,
711`user-login-name' and `user-mail-address' are used to exclude yourself
712as correspondent.
713
714Usually you don't have to set this variable, except if you collect
715mails sent by you under different user names. Then it should be a
993d8b7d 716regexp matching your mail addresses.
c0510d27 717
3b55acc9
GM
718*** The new user-option rmail-confirm-expunge controls whether and how
719to ask for confirmation before expunging deleted messages from an
720Rmail file. You can choose between no confirmation, confirmation
721with y-or-n-p, or confirmation with yes-or-no-p. Default is to ask
722for confirmation with yes-or-no-p.
723
6a1950ec
GM
724*** RET is now bound in the Rmail summary to rmail-summary-goto-msg,
725like `j'.
726
5bb6f079
RS
727*** There is a new user option `rmail-digest-end-regexps' that
728specifies the regular expressions to detect the line that ends a
2d5e9b54 729digest message.
e26cec67 730
993d8b7d
DL
731*** The new user option `rmail-automatic-folder-directives' specifies
732in which folder to put messages automatically.
733
400a1ed0
GM
734** Changes to TeX mode
735
736The default mode has been changed from `plain-tex-mode' to
737`latex-mode'.
738
a933dad1
DL
739** Changes to RefTeX mode
740
741*** RefTeX has new support for index generation. Index entries can be
742 created with `C-c <', with completion available on index keys.
743 Pressing `C-c /' indexes the word at the cursor with a default
744 macro. `C-c >' compiles all index entries into an alphabetically
745 sorted *Index* buffer which looks like the final index. Entries
746 can be edited from that buffer.
747
748*** Label and citation key selection now allow to select several
749 items and reference them together (use `m' to mark items, `a' or
750 `A' to use all marked entries).
751
752*** reftex.el has been split into a number of smaller files to reduce
753 memory use when only a part of RefTeX is being used.
754
755*** a new command `reftex-view-crossref-from-bibtex' (bound to `C-c &'
756 in BibTeX-mode) can be called in a BibTeX database buffer in order
757 to show locations in LaTeX documents where a particular entry has
758 been cited.
759
38de9631
GM
760** Emacs Lisp mode now allows multiple levels of outline headings.
761The level of a heading is determined from the number of leading
762semicolons in a heading line. Toplevel forms starting with a `('
763in column 1 are always made leaves.
764
a933dad1
DL
765** The M-x time-stamp command (most commonly used on write-file-hooks)
766has the following new features:
767
768*** The patterns for finding the time stamp and for updating a pattern
769may match text spanning multiple lines. For example, some people like
770to have the filename and date on separate lines. The new variable
771time-stamp-inserts-lines controls the matching for multi-line patterns.
772
773*** More than one time stamp can be updated in the same file. This
774feature is useful if you need separate time stamps in a program source
775file to both include in formatted documentation and insert in the
776compiled binary. The same time-stamp will be written at each matching
777pattern. The variable time-stamp-count enables this new feature; it
778defaults to 1.
779
5d94f558 780** Partial Completion mode now completes environment variables in
b675095c
GM
781file names.
782
424d8b44 783+++
a933dad1
DL
784** Tooltips.
785
786Tooltips are small X windows displaying a help string at the current
787mouse position. To use them, use the Lisp package `tooltip' which you
788can access via the user option `tooltip-mode'.
789
790Tooltips also provides support for GUD debugging. If activated,
791variable values can be displayed in tooltips by pointing at them with
792the mouse in source buffers. You can customize various aspects of the
793tooltip display in the group `tooltip'.
794
424d8b44 795+++
a933dad1
DL
796** Customize changes
797
798*** Customize now supports comments about customized items. Use the
34f94cf9
DL
799`State' menu to add comments. Note that customization comments will
800cause the customizations to fail in earlier versions of Emacs.
a933dad1
DL
801
802*** The new option `custom-buffer-done-function' says whether to kill
803Custom buffers when you've done with them or just bury them (the
804default).
805
0ae51efb
GM
806*** The keyword :set-after in defcustom allows to specify dependencies
807between custom options. Example:
808
809 (defcustom default-input-method nil
810 "*Default input method for multilingual text (a string).
811 This is the input method activated automatically by the command
812 `toggle-input-method' (\\[toggle-input-method])."
813 :group 'mule
814 :type '(choice (const nil) string)
815 :set-after '(current-language-environment))
816
817This specifies that default-input-method should be set after
818current-language-environment even if default-input-method appears
819first in a custom-set-variables statement.
820
a933dad1
DL
821** New features in evaluation commands
822
5e03eb84 823*** The commands to evaluate Lisp expressions, such as C-M-x in Lisp
a933dad1
DL
824modes, C-j in Lisp Interaction mode, and M-:, now bind the variables
825print-level, print-length, and debug-on-error based on the
826customizable variables eval-expression-print-level,
827eval-expression-print-length, and eval-expression-debug-on-error.
828
5e03eb84
GM
829*** The function `eval-defun' (M-C-x) now loads Edebug and instruments
830code when called with a prefix argument.
831
ead53494
GM
832** Ispell changes
833
bbe15990
EZ
834*** The command `ispell' now spell-checks a region if
835transient-mark-mode is on, and the mark is active. Otherwise it
ead53494
GM
836spell-checks the current buffer.
837
385ff9e3
GM
838*** Support for synchronous subprocesses - DOS/Windoze - has been
839added.
840
841*** An "alignment error" bug was fixed when a manual spelling
842correction is made and re-checked.
843
74ec6045 844*** An Italian and a Portuguese dictionary definition has been added.
385ff9e3
GM
845
846*** Region skipping performance has been vastly improved in some
847cases.
848
849*** Spell checking HTML buffers has been improved and isn't so strict
850on syntax errors.
851
852*** The buffer-local words are now always placed on a new line at the
853end of the buffer.
854
a933dad1
DL
855** Dired changes
856
857*** New variable `dired-recursive-deletes' determines if the delete
858command will delete non-empty directories recursively. The default
859is, delete only empty directories.
860
861*** New variable `dired-recursive-copies' determines if the copy
862command will copy directories recursively. The default is, do not
863copy directories recursively.
864
f6737cde
GM
865*** In command `dired-do-shell-command' (usually bound to `!') a `?'
866in the shell command has a special meaning similar to `*', but with
867the difference that the command will be run on each file individually.
868
2f72fd2f
GM
869*** The new command `dired-find-alternate-file' (usually bound to `a')
870replaces the Dired buffer with the buffer for an alternate file or
871directory.
872
7381ae05
MB
873*** The new command `dired-show-file-type' (usually bound to `w') shows
874a message in the echo area describing what type of file the point is on.
875This command invokes the external program `file' do its work, and so
876will only work on systems with that program, and will be only as
877accurate or inaccurate as it is.
878
e024b101
GM
879*** Dired now properly handles undo changes of adding/removing `-R'
880from ls switches.
881
a933dad1
DL
882** The variable mail-specify-envelope-from controls whether to
883use the -f option when sending mail.
884
b1c609b1
GM
885** CC mode changes.
886
887Note: This release contains changes that might not be compatible with
888current user setups (although it's believed that these
889incompatibilities will only show in very uncommon circumstances).
890However, since the impact is uncertain, these changes may be rolled
891back depending on user feedback. Therefore there's no forward
892compatibility guarantee wrt the new features introduced in this
893release.
894
7972fcfc
GM
895*** c-style-variables-are-local-p now defaults to t.
896This is an incompatible change that has been made to make the behavior
897of the style system wrt global variable settings less confusing for
898non-advanced users. If you know what this variable does you might
899want to set it to nil in your .emacs, otherwise you probably don't
900have to bother.
901
902Defaulting c-style-variables-are-local-p to t avoids the confusing
903situation that occurs when a user sets some style variables globally
487522fe 904and edits both a Java and a non-Java file in the same Emacs session.
7972fcfc
GM
905If the style variables aren't buffer local in this case, loading of
906the second file will cause the default style (either "gnu" or "java"
907by default) to override the global settings made by the user.
908
b1c609b1
GM
909*** New initialization procedure for the style system.
910When the initial style for a buffer is determined by CC Mode (from the
911variable c-default-style), the global values of style variables now
912take precedence over the values specified by the chosen style. This
913is different than the old behavior: previously, the style-specific
914settings would override the global settings. This change makes it
915possible to do simple configuration in the intuitive way with
916Customize or with setq lines in one's .emacs file.
917
918By default, the global value of every style variable is the new
919special symbol set-from-style, which causes the value to be taken from
920the style system. This means that in effect, only an explicit setting
921of a style variable will cause the "overriding" behavior described
922above.
923
924Also note that global settings override style-specific settings *only*
925when the initial style of a buffer is chosen by a CC Mode major mode
926function. When a style is chosen in other ways --- for example, by a
927call like (c-set-style "gnu") in a hook, or via M-x c-set-style ---
928then the style-specific values take precedence over any global style
929values. In Lisp terms, global values override style-specific values
930only when the new second argument to c-set-style is non-nil; see the
931function documentation for more info.
932
933The purpose of these changes is to make it easier for users,
934especially novice users, to do simple customizations with Customize or
935with setq in their .emacs files. On the other hand, the new system is
936intended to be compatible with advanced users' customizations as well,
937such as those that choose styles in hooks or whatnot. This new system
938is believed to be almost entirely compatible with current
939configurations, in spite of the changed precedence between style and
940global variable settings when a buffer's default style is set.
941
942(Thanks to Eric Eide for clarifying this explanation a bit.)
943
944**** c-offsets-alist is now a customizable variable.
945This became possible as a result of the new initialization behavior.
946
947This variable is treated slightly differently from the other style
948variables; instead of using the symbol set-from-style, it will be
949completed with the syntactic symbols it doesn't already contain when
950the style is first initialized. This means it now defaults to the
951empty list to make all syntactic elements get their values from the
952style system.
953
954**** Compatibility variable to restore the old behavior.
955In case your configuration doesn't work with this change, you can set
956c-old-style-variable-behavior to non-nil to get the old behavior back
957as far as possible.
958
959*** Improvements to line breaking and text filling.
960CC Mode now handles this more intelligently and seamlessly wrt the
961surrounding code, especially inside comments. For details see the new
962chapter about this in the manual.
963
964**** New variable to recognize comment line prefix decorations.
965The variable c-comment-prefix-regexp has been added to properly
966recognize the line prefix in both block and line comments. It's
967primarily used to initialize the various paragraph recognition and
968adaptive filling variables that the text handling functions uses.
969
970**** New variable c-block-comment-prefix.
971This is a generalization of the now obsolete variable
972c-comment-continuation-stars to handle arbitrary strings.
973
974**** CC Mode now uses adaptive fill mode.
975This to make it adapt better to the paragraph style inside comments.
976
977It's also possible to use other adaptive filling packages inside CC
978Mode, notably Kyle E. Jones' Filladapt mode (http://wonderworks.com/).
979A new convenience function c-setup-filladapt sets up Filladapt for use
980inside CC Mode.
981
982Note though that the 2.12 version of Filladapt lacks a feature that
983causes it to work suboptimally when c-comment-prefix-regexp can match
984the empty string (which it commonly does). A patch for that is
985available from the CC Mode web site (http://www.python.org/emacs/
986cc-mode/).
987
988**** It's now possible to selectively turn off auto filling.
989The variable c-ignore-auto-fill is used to ignore auto fill mode in
990specific contexts, e.g. in preprocessor directives and in string
991literals.
992
993**** New context sensitive line break function c-context-line-break.
994It works like newline-and-indent in normal code, and adapts the line
995prefix according to the comment style when used inside comments. If
996you're normally using newline-and-indent, you might want to switch to
997this function.
998
999*** Fixes to IDL mode.
1000It now does a better job in recognizing only the constructs relevant
1001to IDL. E.g. it no longer matches "class" as the beginning of a
1002struct block, but it does match the CORBA 2.3 "valuetype" keyword.
1003Thanks to Eric Eide.
1004
1005*** Improvements to the Whitesmith style.
1006It now keeps the style consistently on all levels and both when
1007opening braces hangs and when they don't.
1008
1009**** New lineup function c-lineup-whitesmith-in-block.
1010
1011*** New lineup functions c-lineup-template-args and c-indent-multi-line-block.
1012See their docstrings for details. c-lineup-template-args does a
1013better job of tracking the brackets used as parens in C++ templates,
1014and is used by default to line up continued template arguments.
1015
1016*** c-lineup-comment now preserves alignment with a comment on the
1017previous line. It used to instead preserve comments that started in
1018the column specified by comment-column.
1019
1020*** c-lineup-C-comments handles "free form" text comments.
1021In comments with a long delimiter line at the start, the indentation
1022is kept unchanged for lines that start with an empty comment line
1023prefix. This is intended for the type of large block comments that
1024contain documentation with its own formatting. In these you normally
1025don't want CC Mode to change the indentation.
1026
1027*** The `c' syntactic symbol is now relative to the comment start
1028instead of the previous line, to make integers usable as lineup
1029arguments.
1030
1031*** All lineup functions have gotten docstrings.
1032
1033*** More preprocessor directive movement functions.
1034c-down-conditional does the reverse of c-up-conditional.
1035c-up-conditional-with-else and c-down-conditional-with-else are
1036variants of these that also stops at "#else" lines (suggested by Don
1037Provan).
1038
1039*** Minor improvements to many movement functions in tricky situations.
1040
c407c570
GM
1041** Makefile mode changes
1042
1043*** The mode now uses the abbrev table `makefile-mode-abbrev-table'.
1044
5d94f558 1045*** Conditionals and include statements are now highlighted when
c407c570
GM
1046Fontlock mode is active.
1047
87be76f6
GM
1048** Isearch changes
1049
3353ef5a
GM
1050*** Isearch now puts a call to `isearch-resume' in the command history,
1051so that searches can be resumed.
1052
1053*** In Isearch mode, M-C-s and M-C-r are now bound like C-s and C-r,
c407c570
GM
1054respectively, i.e. you can repeat a regexp isearch with the same keys
1055that started the search.
1056
87be76f6 1057*** In Isearch mode, mouse-2 in the echo area now yanks the current
a933dad1
DL
1058selection into the search string rather than giving an error.
1059
87be76f6
GM
1060*** There is a new lazy highlighting feature in incremental search.
1061
d35fce81 1062Lazy highlighting is switched on/off by customizing variable
87be76f6
GM
1063`isearch-lazy-highlight'. When active, all matches for the current
1064search string are highlighted. The current match is highlighted as
1065before using face `isearch' or `region'. All other matches are
1066highlighted using face `isearch-lazy-highlight-face' which defaults to
5d94f558 1067`secondary-selection'.
87be76f6
GM
1068
1069The extra highlighting makes it easier to anticipate where the cursor
1070will end up each time you press C-s or C-r to repeat a pending search.
1071Highlighting of these additional matches happens in a deferred fashion
1072using "idle timers," so the cycles needed do not rob isearch of its
1073usual snappy response.
1074
1075If `isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup' is set to t, highlights for
1076matches are automatically cleared when you end the search. If it is
1077set to nil, you can remove the highlights manually with `M-x
1078isearch-lazy-highlight-cleanup'.
1079
35384f06
GM
1080** Changes in sort.el
1081
1082The function sort-numeric-fields interprets numbers starting with `0'
12c25bdc 1083as octal and numbers starting with `0x' or `0X' as hexadecimal. The
35384f06
GM
1084new user-option sort-numberic-base can be used to specify a default
1085numeric base.
87be76f6 1086
d7b511c4
GM
1087** Changes to Ange-ftp
1088
424d8b44 1089+++
d7b511c4 1090*** Ange-ftp allows you to specify of a port number in remote file
d67f47e4
DL
1091names cleanly. It is appended to the host name, separated by a hash
1092sign, e.g. `/foo@bar.org#666:mumble'. (This syntax comes from EFS.)
1093
d7b511c4
GM
1094*** If the new user-option `ange-ftp-try-passive-mode' is set, passive
1095ftp mode will be used if the ftp client supports that.
1096
9d453139
SS
1097*** Ange-ftp handles the output of the w32-style clients which
1098output ^M at the end of lines.
1099
4b9347b3
GM
1100** Shell script mode changes.
1101
1102Shell script mode (sh-script) can now indent scripts for shells
1103derived from sh and rc. The indentation style is customizeable, and
1104sh-script can attempt to "learn" the current buffer's style.
1105
79214ddf
FP
1106** Etags changes.
1107
1108*** In DOS, etags looks for file.cgz if it cannot find file.c.
1109
aca0be23 1110*** New option --ignore-case-regex is an alternative to --regex. It is now
8dc78b52
FP
1111possible to bind a regexp to a language, by prepending the regexp with
1112{lang}, where lang is one of the languages that `etags --help' prints out.
1113This feature is useful especially for regex files, where each line contains
1114a regular expression. The manual contains details.
aca0be23 1115
79214ddf
FP
1116*** In C and derived languages, etags creates tags for function
1117declarations when given the --declarations option.
1118
1119*** In C++, tags are created for "operator". The tags have the form
aca0be23 1120"operator+", without spaces between the keyword and the operator.
79214ddf
FP
1121
1122*** New language Ada: tags are functions, procedures, packages, tasks, and
1123types.
1124
de370c4c 1125*** In Fortran, `procedure' is not tagged.
79214ddf
FP
1126
1127*** In Java, tags are created for "interface".
1128
1129*** In Lisp, "(defstruct (foo", "(defun (operator" and similar constructs
1130are now tagged.
1131
1132*** In Perl, the --globals option tags global variables. my and local
1133variables are tagged.
1134
1135*** New language Python: def and class at the beginning of a line are tags.
1136
8dc78b52
FP
1137*** .ss files are Scheme files, .pdb is Postscript with C syntax, .psw is
1138for PSWrap.
79214ddf 1139
f6737cde
GM
1140** Changes in etags.el
1141
3f6e4b8b
GM
1142*** The new user-option tags-case-fold-search can be used to make
1143tags operations case-sensitive or case-insensitive. The default
1144is to use the same setting as case-fold-search.
1145
f6737cde
GM
1146*** You can display additional output with M-x tags-apropos by setting
1147the new variable tags-apropos-additional-actions.
1148
1149If non-nil, the variable's value should be a list of triples (TITLE
1150FUNCTION TO-SEARCH). For each triple, M-x tags-apropos processes
1151TO-SEARCH and lists tags from it. TO-SEARCH should be an alist,
1152obarray, or symbol. If it is a symbol, the symbol's value is used.
1153
1154TITLE is a string to use to label the list of tags from TO-SEARCH.
1155
1156FUNCTION is a function to call when an entry is selected in the Tags
1157List buffer. It is called with one argument, the selected symbol.
1158
1159A useful example value for this variable might be something like:
1160
1161 '(("Emacs Lisp" Info-goto-emacs-command-node obarray)
1162 ("Common Lisp" common-lisp-hyperspec common-lisp-hyperspec-obarray)
1163 ("SCWM" scwm-documentation scwm-obarray))
1164
1165*** The face tags-tag-face can be used to customize the appearance
1166of tags in the output of M-x tags-apropos.
1167
1168*** Setting tags-apropos-verbose to a non-nil value displays the
1169names of tags files in the *Tags List* buffer.
1170
424d8b44 1171+++
fbc164de
PE
1172** Emacs now attempts to determine the initial language environment
1173and preferred and locale coding systems systematically from the
1174LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG environment variables during startup.
1175
0b8a3a6d
DL
1176** New language environments `Polish', `Latin-8' and `Latin-9'.
1177Latin-8 and Latin-9 correspond respectively to the ISO character sets
11788859-14 (Celtic) and 8859-15 (updated Latin-1, with the Euro sign).
1179There is currently no specific input method support for them.
59c1bf85 1180
424d8b44 1181+++
163ea954 1182** Fortran mode has a new command `fortran-strip-sequence-nos' to
e33b0397
DL
1183remove text past column 72. The syntax class of `\' in Fortran is now
1184appropriate for C-style escape sequences in strings.
1185
1186** SGML mode's default `sgml-validate-command' is now `nsgmls'.
1187
424d8b44 1188+++
6f8ea2ae
DL
1189** A new command `view-emacs-problems' (C-h P) displays the PROBLEMS file.
1190
c0510d27
GM
1191** The Dabbrev package has a new user-option `dabbrev-ignore-regexps'
1192containing a list of regular expressions. Buffers matching a regular
1193expression from that list, are not checked.
1194
5d94f558
SS
1195** Emacs can now figure out modification times of remote files.
1196When you do C-x C-f /user@host:/path/file RET and edit the file,
1197and someone else modifies the file, you will be prompted to revert
1198the buffer, just like for the local files.
1199
dc28878c
GM
1200** The buffer menu (C-x C-b) no longer lists the *Buffer List* buffer.
1201
a933dad1
DL
1202** New modes and packages
1203
ff332647 1204+++
90cbf47e
GM
1205*** The new package timeclock.el is a mode is for keeping track of time
1206intervals. You can use it for whatever purpose you like, but the
1207typical scenario is to keep track of how much time you spend working
1208on certain projects.
1209
1210*** The new package hi-lock.el, text matching interactively entered
d96d6bb0 1211regexp's can be highlighted. For example,
abb2db1c 1212
d96d6bb0 1213 M-x highlight-regexp RET clearly RET RET
abb2db1c
GM
1214
1215will highlight all occurrences of `clearly' using a yellow background
1216face. New occurrences of `clearly' will be highlighted as they are
1217typed. `M-x unhighlight-regexp RET' will remove the highlighting.
1218Any existing face can be used for highlighting and a set of
1219appropriate faces is provided. The regexps can be written into the
1220current buffer in a form that will be recognized the next time the
1221corresponding file is read.
1222
424d8b44 1223+++
d96d6bb0 1224*** The new package zone.el plays games with Emacs' display when
abb2db1c
GM
1225Emacs is idle.
1226
31fc5d15
GM
1227*** The new package xml.el provides a simple but generic XML
1228parser. It doesn't parse the DTDs however.
1229
5cb6a58e
SM
1230*** The comment operations are now provided by the newcomment.el
1231package which allows different styles of comment-region and should
1232be more robust while offering the same functionality.
1233
424d8b44 1234+++
578979ee
GM
1235*** The Ebrowse package implements a C++ class browser and tags
1236facilities tailored for use with C++. It is documented in a
1237separate Texinfo file.
1238
424d8b44
DL
1239+++
1240*** The PCL-CVS package available by either running M-x cvs-examine or
1241by visiting a CVS administrative directory (with a prefix argument)
1242provides an alternative interface to VC-dired for CVS. It comes with
1243`log-view-mode' to view RCS and SCCS logs and `log-edit-mode' used to
1244enter checkin log messages.
dc1178bf 1245
424d8b44 1246+++
6abca616
EZ
1247*** The new package called `woman' allows to browse Unix man pages
1248without invoking external programs.
1249
1250The command `M-x woman' formats manual pages entirely in Emacs Lisp
1251and then displays them, like `M-x manual-entry' does. Unlike
1252`manual-entry', `woman' does not invoke any external programs, so it
1253is useful on systems such as MS-DOS/MS-Windows where the `man' and
490f2e7b 1254Groff or `troff' commands are not readily available.
6abca616
EZ
1255
1256The command `M-x woman-find-file' asks for the file name of a man
1257page, then formats and displays it like `M-x woman' does.
1258
5e5dff44
GM
1259*** The new command M-x re-builder offers a convenient interface for
1260authoring regular expressions with immediate visual feedback.
1261
1262The buffer from which the command was called becomes the target for
1263the regexp editor popping up in a separate window. Matching text in
1264the target buffer is immediately color marked during the editing.
1265Each sub-expression of the regexp will show up in a different face so
1266even complex regexps can be edited and verified on target data in a
1267single step.
1268
1269On displays not supporting faces the matches instead blink like
1270matching parens to make them stand out. On such a setup you will
1271probably also want to use the sub-expression mode when the regexp
1272contains such to get feedback about their respective limits.
1273
424d8b44 1274+++
f7136ee8
GM
1275*** glasses-mode is a minor mode that makes
1276unreadableIdentifiersLikeThis readable. It works as glasses, without
1277actually modifying content of a buffer.
1278
bbd9b566
GM
1279*** The package ebnf2ps translates an EBNF to a syntactic chart in
1280PostScript.
1281
1282Currently accepts ad-hoc EBNF, ISO EBNF and Bison/Yacc.
1283
1284The ad-hoc default EBNF syntax has the following elements:
1285
1286 ; comment (until end of line)
1287 A non-terminal
1288 "C" terminal
1289 ?C? special
1290 $A default non-terminal
1291 $"C" default terminal
1292 $?C? default special
1293 A = B. production (A is the header and B the body)
1294 C D sequence (C occurs before D)
1295 C | D alternative (C or D occurs)
1296 A - B exception (A excluding B, B without any non-terminal)
1297 n * A repetition (A repeats n (integer) times)
1298 (C) group (expression C is grouped together)
1299 [C] optional (C may or not occurs)
1300 C+ one or more occurrences of C
1301 {C}+ one or more occurrences of C
1302 {C}* zero or more occurrences of C
1303 {C} zero or more occurrences of C
1304 C / D equivalent to: C {D C}*
1305 {C || D}+ equivalent to: C {D C}*
1306 {C || D}* equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1307 {C || D} equivalent to: [C {D C}*]
1308
1309Please, see ebnf2ps documentation for EBNF syntax and how to use it.
1310
99453a38
GM
1311*** The package align.el will align columns within a region, using M-x
1312align. Its mode-specific rules, based on regular expressions,
1313determine where the columns should be split. In C and C++, for
1314example, it will align variable names in declaration lists, or the
1315equal signs of assignments.
1316
424d8b44 1317+++
559cee90
DL
1318*** `paragraph-indent-minor-mode' is a new minor mode supporting
1319paragraphs in the same style as `paragraph-indent-text-mode'.
1320
424d8b44 1321+++
6448a6b3
GM
1322*** bs.el is a new package for buffer selection similar to
1323list-buffers or electric-buffer-list. Use M-x bs-show to display a
1324buffer menu with this package. You can use M-x bs-customize to
1325customize the package.
1326
6344985d
GM
1327*** find-lisp.el is a package emulating the Unix find command in Lisp.
1328
249652b1
GM
1329*** calculator.el is a small calculator package that is intended to
1330replace desktop calculators such as xcalc and calc.exe. Actually, it
1331is not too small - it has more features than most desktop calculators,
1332and can be customized easily to get many more functions. It should
1333not be confused with "calc" which is a much bigger mathematical tool
1334which answers different needs.
1335
424d8b44 1336+++
3476b54a
GM
1337*** The minor modes cwarn-mode and global-cwarn-mode highlights
1338suspicious C and C++ constructions. Currently, assignments inside
1339expressions, semicolon following `if', `for' and `while' (except, of
1340course, after a `do .. while' statement), and C++ functions with
1341reference parameters are recognized. The modes require font-lock mode
1342to be enabled.
1343
424d8b44 1344+++
8964fec7
SM
1345*** smerge-mode.el provides `smerge-mode', a simple minor-mode for files
1346containing diff3-style conflict markers, such as generated by RCS.
1347
424d8b44 1348+++
a933dad1
DL
1349*** 5x5.el is a simple puzzle game.
1350
424d8b44 1351+++
a933dad1
DL
1352*** hl-line.el provides a minor mode to highlight the current line.
1353
1354*** ansi-color.el translates ANSI terminal escapes into text-properties.
1355
1356*** delphi.el provides a major mode for editing the Delphi (Object
1357Pascal) language.
1358
1359*** quickurl.el provides a simple method of inserting a URL based on
1360the text at point.
1361
1362*** sql.el provides an interface to SQL data bases.
1363
424d8b44 1364+++
8d54eb69
DL
1365*** fortune.el uses the fortune program to create mail/news signatures.
1366
a933dad1
DL
1367*** whitespace.el ???
1368
ebcfda83
GM
1369*** PostScript mode (ps-mode) is a new major mode for editing PostScript
1370files. It offers: interaction with a PostScript interpreter, including
1371(very basic) error handling; fontification, easily customizable for
1372interpreter messages; auto-indentation; insertion of EPSF templates and
1373often used code snippets; viewing of BoundingBox; commenting out /
1374uncommenting regions; conversion of 8bit characters to PostScript octal
1375codes. All functionality is accessible through a menu.
1376
1377*** delim-col helps to prettify columns in a text region or rectangle.
1378
1379Here is an example of columns:
1380
1381horse apple bus
1382dog pineapple car EXTRA
1383porcupine strawberry airplane
1384
1385Doing the following settings:
1386
1387 (setq delimit-columns-str-before "[ ")
1388 (setq delimit-columns-str-after " ]")
1389 (setq delimit-columns-str-separator ", ")
1390 (setq delimit-columns-separator "\t")
1391
1392
1393Selecting the lines above and typing:
1394
1395 M-x delimit-columns-region
1396
1397It results:
1398
1399[ horse , apple , bus , ]
1400[ dog , pineapple , car , EXTRA ]
1401[ porcupine, strawberry, airplane, ]
1402
1403delim-col has the following options:
1404
1405 delimit-columns-str-before Specify a string to be inserted
1406 before all columns.
1407
1408 delimit-columns-str-separator Specify a string to be inserted
1409 between each column.
1410
1411 delimit-columns-str-after Specify a string to be inserted
1412 after all columns.
1413
1414 delimit-columns-separator Specify a regexp which separates
1415 each column.
1416
1417delim-col has the following commands:
1418
1419 delimit-columns-region Prettify all columns in a text region.
1420 delimit-columns-rectangle Prettify all columns in a text rectangle.
1421
424d8b44 1422+++
f507826c 1423*** The package recentf.el maintains a menu for visiting files that
31fc5d15
GM
1424were operated on recently.
1425
1426M-x recentf-mode RET toggles recentf mode.
f507826c 1427
31fc5d15
GM
1428M-x customize-variable RET recentf-mode RET can be used to enable
1429recentf at Emacs startup.
f507826c 1430
31fc5d15
GM
1431M-x customize-variable RET recentf-menu-filter RET to specify a menu
1432filter function to change the menu appearance. For example, the recent
1433file list can be displayed:
f507826c 1434
31fc5d15
GM
1435- organized by major modes, directories or user defined rules.
1436- sorted by file pathes, file names, ascending or descending.
1437- showing pathes relative to the current default-directory
f507826c 1438
31fc5d15
GM
1439The `recentf-filter-changer' menu filter function allows to
1440dynamically change the menu appearance.
f507826c 1441
8062f458
DL
1442*** elide-head.el provides a mechanism for eliding boilerplate header
1443text.
1444
424d8b44 1445+++
36e24b82 1446*** footnote.el provides `footnote-mode', a minor mode supporting use
91735437
DL
1447of footnotes. It is intended for use with Message mode, but isn't
1448specific to Message mode.
1449
424d8b44 1450+++
36e24b82
DL
1451*** diff-mode.el provides `diff-mode', a major mode for
1452viewing/editing context diffs (patches). It is selected for files
1453with extension `.diff', `.diffs', `.patch' and `.rej'.
1454
424d8b44 1455+++
aaa659ef
DL
1456*** EUDC, the Emacs Unified Directory Client, provides a common user
1457interface to access directory servers using different directory
1458protocols. It has a separate manual.
1459
eee54b0e
DL
1460*** autoconf.el provides a major mode for editing configure.in files
1461for Autoconf, selected automatically.
1462
424d8b44 1463+++
612839b6
GM
1464*** windmove.el provides moving between windows.
1465
5d94f558 1466*** crm.el provides a facility to read multiple strings from the
612839b6 1467minibuffer with completion.
aaa659ef 1468
399da7e3
DL
1469*** todo-mode.el provides management of TODO lists and integration
1470with the diary features.
1471
6e417ca5
DL
1472*** autoarg.el provides a feature reported from Twenex Emacs whereby
1473numeric keys supply prefix args rather than self inserting.
1474
4a27bdfb
GM
1475*** The function `turn-off-auto-fill' unconditionally turns off Auto
1476Fill mode.
1477
a933dad1
DL
1478** Withdrawn packages
1479
1480*** mldrag.el has been removed. mouse.el provides the same
1481functionality with aliases for the mldrag functions.
25a81338 1482
3261c1d8
DL
1483*** eval-reg.el has been obsoleted by changes to edebug.el and removed.
1484
1485*** ph.el has been obsoleted by EUDC and removed.
ce75fd23
GM
1486
1487\f
1488* Lisp changes made after edition 2.6 of the Emacs Lisp Manual,
1489(Display-related features are described in a page of their own below.)
1490
424d8b44
DL
1491+++
1492** Reading from the mini-buffer now reads from standard input if Emacs
1493is running in batch mode. For example,
1494
1495 (message "%s" (read t))
1496
1497will read a Lisp expression from standard input and print the result
1498to standard output.
1499
1500+++
1501** The argument of `down-list', `backward-up-list', `up-list',
1502`kill-sexp', `backward-kill-sexp' and `mark-sexp' is now optional.
1503
ead53494
GM
1504** If `display-buffer-reuse-frames' is set, function `display-buffer'
1505will raise frames displaying a buffer, instead of creating a new
1506frame or window.
1507
27848c01
GM
1508** Two new functions for removing elements from lists/sequences
1509were added
1510
1511- Function: remove ELT SEQ
1512
1513Return a copy of SEQ with all occurences of ELT removed. SEQ must be
1514a list, vector, or string. The comparison is done with `equal'.
1515
1516- Function: remq ELT LIST
1517
1518Return a copy of LIST with all occurences of ELT removed. The
1519comparison is done with `eq'.
1520
1521** The function `delete' now also works with vectors and strings.
3ab82477 1522
b548072f
GM
1523** The meaning of the `:weakness WEAK' argument of make-hash-table
1524has been changed.
1525
424d8b44 1526+++
07b14857
KH
1527** Function `aset' stores any multibyte character in any string
1528without signaling "Attempt to change char length of a string". It may
1529convert a unibyte string to multibyte if necessary.
1530
9662da0b
GM
1531** The value of the `help-echo' text property is called as a function
1532or evaluated, if it is not a string already, to obtain a help string.
d5aa31d8 1533
7fce7efb
DL
1534** Function `make-obsolete' now has an optional arg to say when the
1535function was declared obsolete.
1536
5d94f558 1537** Function `plist-member' is renamed from `widget-plist-member' (which is
7fce7efb
DL
1538retained as an alias).
1539
f98d3086
SM
1540** Easy-menu's :filter now works as in XEmacs.
1541It takes the unconverted (i.e. XEmacs) form of the menu and the result
1542is automatically converted to Emacs' form.
1543
87efd256
GM
1544** The new function `window-list' has been defined
1545
1546- Function: window-list &optional WINDOW MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES
1547
1548Return a list of windows in canonical order. The parameters WINDOW,
1549MINIBUF and ALL-FRAMES are defined like for `next-window'.
1550
67c9a1d2
GM
1551** There's a new function `some-window' defined as follows
1552
1553- Function: some-window PREDICATE &optional MINIBUF ALL-FRAMES DEFAULT
1554
1555Return a window satisfying PREDICATE.
1556
1557This function cycles through all visible windows using `walk-windows',
1558calling PREDICATE on each one. PREDICATE is called with a window as
1559argument. The first window for which PREDICATE returns a non-nil
1560value is returned. If no window satisfies PREDICATE, DEFAULT is
1561returned.
1562
1563Optional second arg MINIBUF t means count the minibuffer window even
1564if not active. MINIBUF nil or omitted means count the minibuffer iff
1565it is active. MINIBUF neither t nor nil means not to count the
1566minibuffer even if it is active.
1567
1568Several frames may share a single minibuffer; if the minibuffer
1569counts, all windows on all frames that share that minibuffer count
1570too. Therefore, if you are using a separate minibuffer frame
1571and the minibuffer is active and MINIBUF says it counts,
1572`walk-windows' includes the windows in the frame from which you
1573entered the minibuffer, as well as the minibuffer window.
1574
1575ALL-FRAMES is the optional third argument.
1576ALL-FRAMES nil or omitted means cycle within the frames as specified above.
1577ALL-FRAMES = `visible' means include windows on all visible frames.
1578ALL-FRAMES = 0 means include windows on all visible and iconified frames.
1579ALL-FRAMES = t means include windows on all frames including invisible frames.
1580If ALL-FRAMES is a frame, it means include windows on that frame.
1581Anything else means restrict to the selected frame.
1582
ead53494
GM
1583** The function `single-key-description' now encloses function key and
1584event names in angle brackets. When called with a second optional
1585argument non-nil, angle brackets won't be printed.
dce6b995 1586
25fa6deb
GM
1587** If the variable `message-truncate-lines' is bound to t around a
1588call to `message', the echo area will not be resized to display that
088831a6
GM
1589message; it will be truncated instead, as it was done in 20.x.
1590Default value is nil.
25fa6deb 1591
5d94f558 1592** The user option `line-number-display-limit' can now be set to nil,
1681ead6
GM
1593meaning no limit.
1594
5d94f558 1595** `select-safe-coding-system' now also checks the most preferred
c08398de
DL
1596coding-system if buffer-file-coding-system is `undecided' and
1597DEFAULT-CODING-SYSTEM is not specified,
1598
80c05bd3 1599** The function `subr-arity' provides information on the argument list
de370c4c
DL
1600of a primitive.
1601
80c05bd3
DL
1602** The text property `keymap' specifies a key map which overrides the
1603buffer's local map and the map specified by the `local-map' property.
1604This is probably what most current uses of `local-map' want, rather
1605than replacing the local map.
1606
4bc7a543
DL
1607** The obsolete variables before-change-function and
1608after-change-function are no longer acted upon and have been removed.
45f485a6
GM
1609
1610** The function `apropos-mode' runs the hook `apropos-mode-hook'.
1611
f0298744
DL
1612** `concat' no longer accepts individual integer arguments, as
1613promised long ago.
1614
5d94f558 1615** The new function `float-time' returns the current time as a float.
a933dad1
DL
1616\f
1617* Lisp changes in Emacs 21.1 (see following page for display-related features)
1618
1619Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
1620--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
1621When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
1622so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
1623
85c75536
MB
1624*** The special form `save-restriction' now works correctly even if the
1625buffer is widened inside the save-restriction and changes made outside
1626the original restriction. Previously, doing this would cause the saved
1627restriction to be restored incorrectly.
1628
0b8a3a6d
DL
1629*** The functions `find-charset-region' and `find-charset-string' include
1630`eight-bit-control' and/or `eight-bit-graphic' in the returned list
1631when it finds 8-bit characters. Previously, it included `ascii' in a
1632multibyte buffer and `unknown' in a unibyte buffer.
1633
1634*** The functions `set-buffer-modified', `string-as-multibyte' and
1635`string-as-unibyte' change the byte sequence of a buffer if it
1636contains a character from the `eight-bit-control' character set.
1637
1638*** The handling of multibyte sequences in a multibyte buffer is
1639changed. Previously, a byte sequence matching the pattern
1640[\200-\237][\240-\377]+ was interpreted as a single character
1641regardless of the length of the trailing bytes [\240-\377]+. Thus, if
1642the sequence was longer than what the leading byte indicated, the
1643extra trailing bytes were ignored by Lisp functions. Now such extra
1644bytes are independent 8-bit characters belonging to the charset
1645eight-bit-graphic.
1646
1647** Fontsets are now implemented using char-tables.
1648
1649A fontset can now be specified for for each independent character, for
1650a group of characters or for a character set rather than just for a
1651character set as previously.
1652
1653*** The arguments of the function `set-fontset-font' are changed.
1654They are NAME, CHARACTER, FONTNAME, and optional FRAME. The function
1655modifies fontset NAME to use FONTNAME for CHARACTER.
1656
1657CHARACTER may be a cons (FROM . TO), where FROM and TO are non-generic
1658characters. In that case FONTNAME is used for all characters in the
1659range FROM and TO (inclusive). CHARACTER may be a charset. In that
1660case FONTNAME is used for all character in the charset.
1661
1662FONTNAME may be a cons (FAMILY . REGISTRY), where FAMILY is the family
1663name of a font and REGSITRY is a registry name of a font.
1664
1665*** Variable x-charset-registry has been deleted. The default charset
1666registries of character sets are set in the default fontset
1667"fontset-default".
1668
1669*** The function `create-fontset-from-fontset-spec' ignores the second
1670argument STYLE-VARIANT. It never creates style-variant fontsets.
1671
1672** The method of composing characters is changed. Now character
1673composition is done by a special text property `composition' in
1674buffers and strings.
1675
1676*** Charset composition is deleted. Emacs never creates a `composite
1677character' which is an independent character with a unique character
1678code. Thus the following functions handling `composite characters'
1679have been deleted: composite-char-component,
1680composite-char-component-count, composite-char-composition-rule,
1681composite-char-composition-rule and decompose-composite-char delete.
1682The variables leading-code-composition and min-composite-char have
1683also been deleted.
1684
1685*** Three more glyph reference points are added. They can be used to
1686specify a composition rule. See the documentation of the variable
1687`reference-point-alist' for more detail.
1688
1689*** The function `compose-region' takes new arguments COMPONENTS and
1690MODIFICATION-FUNC. With COMPONENTS, you can specify not only a
1691composition rule but also characters to be composed. Such characters
1692may differ between buffer and string text.
1693
1694*** The function `compose-string' takes new arguments START, END,
1695COMPONENTS, and MODIFICATION-FUNC.
1696
1697*** The function `compose-string' puts text property `composition'
1698directly on the argument STRING instead of returning a new string.
1699Likewise, the function `decompose-string' just removes text property
1700`composition' from STRING.
1701
1702*** The new function `find-composition' returns information about
1703a composition at a specified position in a buffer or a string.
1704
1705*** The function `decompose-composite-char' is now labeled as
1706obsolete.
1707
1708** The new character set `mule-unicode-0100-24ff' is introduced for
1709Unicode characters of the range U+0100..U+24FF. Currently, this
1710character set is not used.
1711
1712** The new character sets `japanese-jisx0213-1' and
1713`japanese-jisx0213-2' are introduced for the new Japanese standard JIS
1714X 0213 Plane 1 and Plane 2.
1715
1716+++
1717** The new character sets `eight-bit-control' and `eight-bit-graphic'
1718are introduced for 8-bit characters in the ranges 0x80..0x9F and
f98d3086 17190xA0..0xFF respectively.
0b8a3a6d 1720
399da7e3 1721+++
f0124b4a
DL
1722** If the APPEND argument of `write-region' is an integer, it seeks to
1723that offset in the file before writing.
1724
f98d3086
SM
1725** The function `add-minor-mode' has been added for convenience and
1726compatibility with XEmacs (and is used internally by define-minor-mode).
7464346d 1727
612839b6
GM
1728** The function `shell-command' now sets the default directory of the
1729`*Shell Command Output*' buffer to the default directory of the buffer
1730from which the command was issued.
1731
1732** The functions `query-replace', `query-replace-regexp',
1733`query-replace-regexp-eval' `map-query-replace-regexp',
1734`replace-string', `replace-regexp', and `perform-replace' take two
1735additional optional arguments START and END that specify the region to
1736operate on.
1737
271b4185
GM
1738** The new function `count-screen-lines' is a more flexible alternative
1739to `window-buffer-height'.
1740
1741- Function: count-screen-lines &optional BEG END COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE WINDOW
1742
1743Return the number of screen lines in the region between BEG and END.
1744The number of screen lines may be different from the number of actual
1745lines, due to line breaking, display table, etc.
1746
1747Optional arguments BEG and END default to `point-min' and `point-max'
1748respectively.
1749
1750If region ends with a newline, ignore it unless optinal third argument
1751COUNT-FINAL-NEWLINE is non-nil.
1752
1753The optional fourth argument WINDOW specifies the window used for
1754obtaining parameters such as width, horizontal scrolling, and so
1755on. The default is to use the selected window's parameters.
1756
1757Like `vertical-motion', `count-screen-lines' always uses the current
1758buffer, regardless of which buffer is displayed in WINDOW. This makes
1759possible to use `count-screen-lines' in any buffer, whether or not it
1760is currently displayed in some window.
1761
3c30cb6e
DL
1762** The new function `mapc' is like `mapcar' but doesn't collect the
1763argument function's results.
1764
62f20204
GM
1765** The functions base64-decode-region and base64-decode-string now
1766signal an error instead of returning nil if decoding fails.
1767
c0510d27
GM
1768** The function sendmail-user-agent-compose now recognizes a `body'
1769header is the list of headers passed to it.
1770
1771** The new function member-ignore-case works like `member', but
1772ignores differences in case and text representation.
1773
1774** The buffer-local variable cursor-type can be used to specify the
19d1bc27
GM
1775cursor to use in windows displaying a buffer. Values are interpreted
1776as follows:
1777
1778 t use the cursor specified for the frame (default)
1779 nil don't display a cursor
1780 `bar' display a bar cursor with default width
1781 (bar . WIDTH) display a bar cursor with width WIDTH
1782 others display a box cursor.
1783
9a0dd3dc
GM
1784** The variable open-paren-in-column-0-is-defun-start controls whether
1785an open parenthesis in column 0 is considered to be the start of a
1786defun. If set, the default, it is considered a defun start. If not
1787set, an open parenthesis in column 0 has no special meaning.
1788
d7b511c4 1789** The new function `string-to-syntax' can be used to translate syntax
dc1178bf 1790specifications in string form as accepted by `modify-syntax-entry' to
d7b511c4
GM
1791the cons-cell form that is used for the values of the `syntax-table'
1792text property, and in `font-lock-syntactic-keywords'.
1793
1794Example:
1795
1796 (string-to-syntax "()")
1797 => (4 . 41)
1798
1fa28578
GM
1799** Emacs' reader supports CL read syntax for integers in bases
1800other than 10.
1801
1802*** `#BINTEGER' or `#bINTEGER' reads INTEGER in binary (radix 2).
1803INTEGER optionally contains a sign.
1804
5d94f558 1805 #b1111
1fa28578 1806 => 15
5d94f558 1807 #b-1111
1fa28578
GM
1808 => -15
1809
1810*** `#OINTEGER' or `#oINTEGER' reads INTEGER in octal (radix 8).
1811
5d94f558 1812 #o666
1fa28578
GM
1813 => 438
1814
1815*** `#XINTEGER' or `#xINTEGER' reads INTEGER in hexadecimal (radix 16).
1816
5d94f558 1817 #xbeef
1fa28578
GM
1818 => 48815
1819
1820*** `#RADIXrINTEGER' reads INTEGER in radix RADIX, 2 <= RADIX <= 36.
1821
5d94f558 1822 #2R-111
1fa28578 1823 => -7
5d94f558 1824 #25rah
1fa28578
GM
1825 => 267
1826
3d4ff2dd 1827** The function `documentation-property' now evaluates the value of
f98d3086 1828the given property to obtain a string if it doesn't refer to etc/DOC
e9b4e5ff
GM
1829and isn't a string.
1830
3d4ff2dd
GM
1831** If called for a symbol, the function `documentation' now looks for
1832a `function-documentation' property of that symbol. If it has a non-nil
1833value, the documentation is taken from that value. If the value is
1834not a string, it is evaluated to obtain a string.
1835
16ce590d
DL
1836+++
1837** The last argument of `define-key-after' defaults to t for convenience.
1838
73825616 1839** The new function `replace-regexp-in-string' replaces all matches
16ce590d
DL
1840for a regexp in a string.
1841
1842** `mouse-position' now runs the abnormal hook
1843`mouse-position-function'.
1844
723e779c
GM
1845** The function string-to-number now returns a float for numbers
1846that don't fit into a Lisp integer.
1847
d1e103b2
GM
1848** The variable keyword-symbols-constants-flag has been removed.
1849Keywords are now always considered constants.
1850
31047e0d
DL
1851+++
1852** The new function `delete-and-extract-region' deletes text and
1853returns it.
1854
7a85e4df
GM
1855** The function `clear-this-command-keys' now also clears the vector
1856returned by function `recent-keys'.
1857
02b14400
RS
1858+++
1859** Variables `beginning-of-defun-function' and `end-of-defun-function'
1860can be used to define handlers for the functions that find defuns.
1861Major modes can define these locally instead of rebinding M-C-a
1862etc. if the normal conventions for defuns are not appropriate for the
1863mode.
404fa7d6 1864
02b14400 1865+++
8964fec7
SM
1866** easy-mmode-define-minor-mode now takes an additional BODY argument
1867and is renamed `define-minor-mode'.
1868
02b14400
RS
1869+++
1870** If an abbrev has a hook function which is a symbol, and that symbol
1871has a non-nil `no-self-insert' property, the return value of the hook
1872function specifies whether an expansion has been done or not. If it
1873returns nil, abbrev-expand also returns nil, meaning "no expansion has
1874been performed."
1875
1876When abbrev expansion is done by typing a self-inserting character,
1877and the abbrev has a hook with the `no-self-insert' property, and the
1878hook function returns non-nil meaning expansion has been done,
1879then the self-inserting character is not inserted.
ef961722 1880
02b14400 1881+++
81da8b32
GM
1882** The function `intern-soft' now accepts a symbol as first argument.
1883In this case, that exact symbol is looked up in the specified obarray,
1884and the function's value is nil if it is not found.
1885
02b14400 1886+++
9e207b90
GM
1887** The new macro `with-syntax-table' can be used to evaluate forms
1888with the syntax table of the current buffer temporarily set to a
1889specified table.
1890
1891 (with-syntax-table TABLE &rest BODY)
1892
1893Evaluate BODY with syntax table of current buffer set to a copy of
03d9c64c
GM
1894TABLE. The current syntax table is saved, BODY is evaluated, and the
1895saved table is restored, even in case of an abnormal exit. Value is
1896what BODY returns.
9e207b90 1897
02b14400 1898+++
d7f89643 1899** Regular expressions now support intervals \{n,m\} as well as
95cd4c40 1900Perl's shy-groups \(?:...\) and non-greedy *? +? and ?? operators.
8964fec7 1901
02b14400 1902+++
dde9e75a
GM
1903** The optional argument BUFFER of function file-local-copy has been
1904removed since it wasn't used by anything.
1905
02b14400 1906+++
9da30515
GM
1907** The file name argument of function `file-locked-p' is now required
1908instead of being optional.
1909
02b14400 1910+++
d20679eb
GM
1911** The new built-in error `text-read-only' is signaled when trying to
1912modify read-only text.
1913
02b14400 1914+++
fbc164de
PE
1915** New functions and variables for locales.
1916
1917The new variable `locale-coding-system' specifies how to encode and
1918decode strings passed to low-level message functions like strerror and
b718982a
PE
1919time functions like strftime. The new variables
1920`system-messages-locale' and `system-time-locale' give the system
1921locales to be used when invoking these two types of functions.
fbc164de
PE
1922
1923The new function `set-locale-environment' sets the language
1924environment, preferred coding system, and locale coding system from
1925the system locale as specified by the LC_ALL, LC_CTYPE, and LANG
b718982a
PE
1926environment variables. Normally, it is invoked during startup and need
1927not be invoked thereafter. It uses the new variables
1928`locale-language-names', `locale-charset-language-names', and
1929`locale-preferred-coding-systems' to make its decisions.
fbc164de 1930
02b14400 1931+++
863476d1
SM
1932** syntax tables now understand nested comments.
1933To declare a comment syntax as allowing nesting, just add an `n'
1934modifier to either of the characters of the comment end and the comment
1935start sequences.
1936
02b14400 1937+++
ef6d912c
GM
1938** The function `pixmap-spec-p' has been renamed `bitmap-spec-p'
1939because `bitmap' is more in line with the usual X terminology.
1940
02b14400 1941+++
a933dad1
DL
1942** New function `propertize'
1943
1944The new function `propertize' can be used to conveniently construct
1945strings with text properties.
1946
1947- Function: propertize STRING &rest PROPERTIES
1948
1949Value is a copy of STRING with text properties assigned as specified
1950by PROPERTIES. PROPERTIES is a sequence of pairs PROPERTY VALUE, with
1951PROPERTY being the name of a text property and VALUE being the
1952specified value of that property. Example:
1953
1954 (propertize "foo" 'face 'bold 'read-only t)
1955
1956+++
1957** push and pop macros.
1958
02b14400
RS
1959Simple versions of the push and pop macros of Common Lisp
1960are now defined in Emacs Lisp. These macros allow only symbols
a933dad1
DL
1961as the place that holds the list to be changed.
1962
1963(push NEWELT LISTNAME) add NEWELT to the front of LISTNAME's value.
1964(pop LISTNAME) return first elt of LISTNAME, and remove it
1965 (thus altering the value of LISTNAME).
1966
02b14400
RS
1967** New dolist and dotimes macros.
1968
6c7fd5aa
RS
1969Simple versions of the dolist and dotimes macros of Common Lisp
1970are now defined in Emacs Lisp.
02b14400
RS
1971
1972(dolist (VAR LIST [RESULT]) BODY...)
1973 Execute body once for each element of LIST,
1974 using the variable VAR to hold the current element.
1975 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1976
1977(dotimes (VAR COUNT [RESULT]) BODY...)
1978 Execute BODY with VAR bound to successive integers running from 0,
1979 inclusive, to COUNT, exclusive.
1980 Then return the value of RESULT, or nil if RESULT is omitted.
1981
a933dad1
DL
1982+++
1983** Regular expressions now support Posix character classes such
1984as [:alpha:], [:space:] and so on.
1985
1986[:digit:] matches 0 through 9
1987[:cntrl:] matches ASCII control characters
1988[:xdigit:] matches 0 through 9, a through f and A through F.
1989[:blank:] matches space and tab only
1990[:graph:] matches graphic characters--everything except ASCII control chars,
1991 space, and DEL.
1992[:print:] matches printing characters--everything except ASCII control chars
1993 and DEL.
1994[:alnum:] matches letters and digits.
1995 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1996 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
1997[:alpha:] matches letters.
1998 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
1999 it matches anything that has word syntax.)
2000[:ascii:] matches ASCII (unibyte) characters.
2001[:nonascii:] matches non-ASCII (multibyte) characters.
2002[:lower:] matches anything lower-case.
2003[:punct:] matches punctuation.
2004 (But at present, for multibyte characters,
2005 it matches anything that has non-word syntax.)
2006[:space:] matches anything that has whitespace syntax.
2007[:upper:] matches anything upper-case.
2008[:word:] matches anything that has word syntax.
2009
2010+++
2011** Emacs now has built-in hash tables.
2012
2013The following functions are defined for hash tables:
2014
2015- Function: make-hash-table ARGS
2016
2017The argument list ARGS consists of keyword/argument pairs. All arguments
2018are optional. The following arguments are defined:
2019
2020:test TEST
2021
2022TEST must be a symbol specifying how to compare keys. Default is `eql'.
2023Predefined are `eq', `eql' and `equal'. If TEST is not predefined,
2024it must have been defined with `define-hash-table-test'.
2025
2026:size SIZE
2027
2028SIZE must be an integer > 0 giving a hint to the implementation how
2029many elements will be put in the hash table. Default size is 65.
2030
2031:rehash-size REHASH-SIZE
2032
2033REHASH-SIZE specifies by how much to grow a hash table once it becomes
2034full. If REHASH-SIZE is an integer, add that to the hash table's old
2035size to get the new size. Otherwise, REHASH-SIZE must be a float >
20361.0, and the new size is computed by multiplying REHASH-SIZE with the
2037old size. Default rehash size is 1.5.
2038
2039:rehash-threshold THRESHOLD
2040
2041THRESHOLD must be a float > 0 and <= 1.0 specifying when to resize the
2042hash table. It is resized when the ratio of (number of entries) /
2043(size of hash table) is >= THRESHOLD. Default threshold is 0.8.
2044
2045:weakness WEAK
2046
b548072f
GM
2047WEAK must be either nil, one of the symbols `key, `value',
2048`key-or-value', `key-and-value', or t, meaning the same as
2049`key-and-value'. Entries are removed from weak tables during garbage
2050collection if their key and/or value are not referenced elsewhere
2051outside of the hash table. Default are non-weak hash tables.
a933dad1
DL
2052
2053- Function: makehash &optional TEST
2054
2055Similar to make-hash-table, but only TEST can be specified.
2056
2057- Function: hash-table-p TABLE
2058
2059Returns non-nil if TABLE is a hash table object.
2060
2061- Function: copy-hash-table TABLE
2062
2063Returns a copy of TABLE. Only the table itself is copied, keys and
2064values are shared.
2065
2066- Function: hash-table-count TABLE
2067
2068Returns the number of entries in TABLE.
2069
2070- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2071
2072Returns the rehash size of TABLE.
2073
2074- Function: hash-table-rehash-threshold TABLE
2075
2076Returns the rehash threshold of TABLE.
2077
2078- Function: hash-table-rehash-size TABLE
2079
2080Returns the size of TABLE.
2081
d96d6bb0 2082- Function: hash-table-test TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2083
2084Returns the test TABLE uses to compare keys.
2085
2086- Function: hash-table-weakness TABLE
2087
2088Returns the weakness specified for TABLE.
2089
2090- Function: clrhash TABLE
2091
2092Clear TABLE.
2093
2094- Function: gethash KEY TABLE &optional DEFAULT
2095
2096Look up KEY in TABLE and return its associated VALUE or DEFAULT if
2097not found.
2098
79214ddf 2099- Function: puthash KEY VALUE TABLE
a933dad1
DL
2100
2101Associate KEY with VALUE in TABLE. If KEY is already associated with
2102another value, replace the old value with VALUE.
2103
2104- Function: remhash KEY TABLE
2105
2106Remove KEY from TABLE if it is there.
2107
2108- Function: maphash FUNCTION TABLE
2109
2110Call FUNCTION for all elements in TABLE. FUNCTION must take two
2111arguments KEY and VALUE.
2112
2113- Function: sxhash OBJ
2114
2115Return a hash code for Lisp object OBJ.
2116
2117- Function: define-hash-table-test NAME TEST-FN HASH-FN
2118
2119Define a new hash table test named NAME. If NAME is specified as
2120a test in `make-hash-table', the table created will use TEST-FN for
79214ddf 2121comparing keys, and HASH-FN to compute hash codes for keys. Test
a933dad1
DL
2122and hash function are stored as symbol property `hash-table-test'
2123of NAME with a value of (TEST-FN HASH-FN).
2124
2125TEST-FN must take two arguments and return non-nil if they are the same.
2126
2127HASH-FN must take one argument and return an integer that is the hash
2128code of the argument. The function should use the whole range of
2129integer values for hash code computation, including negative integers.
2130
2131Example: The following creates a hash table whose keys are supposed to
2132be strings that are compared case-insensitively.
2133
2134 (defun case-fold-string= (a b)
2135 (compare-strings a nil nil b nil nil t))
2136
2137 (defun case-fold-string-hash (a)
2138 (sxhash (upcase a)))
2139
79214ddf 2140 (define-hash-table-test 'case-fold 'case-fold-string=
a933dad1
DL
2141 'case-fold-string-hash))
2142
2143 (make-hash-table :test 'case-fold)
2144
2145+++
2146** The Lisp reader handles circular structure.
2147
2148It now works to use the #N= and #N# constructs to represent
2149circular structures. For example, #1=(a . #1#) represents
2150a cons cell which is its own cdr.
2151
2152+++
2153** The Lisp printer handles circular structure.
2154
2155If you bind print-circle to a non-nil value, the Lisp printer outputs
2156#N= and #N# constructs to represent circular and shared structure.
2157
a933dad1
DL
2158+++
2159** If the second argument to `move-to-column' is anything but nil or
2160t, that means replace a tab with spaces if necessary to reach the
2161specified column, but do not add spaces at the end of the line if it
2162is too short to reach that column.
2163
2164+++
2165** perform-replace has a new feature: the REPLACEMENTS argument may
2166now be a cons cell (FUNCTION . DATA). This means to call FUNCTION
2167after each match to get the replacement text. FUNCTION is called with
2168two arguments: DATA, and the number of replacements already made.
2169
2170If the FROM-STRING contains any upper-case letters,
2171perform-replace also turns off `case-fold-search' temporarily
2172and inserts the replacement text without altering case in it.
2173
2174+++
2175** The function buffer-size now accepts an optional argument
2176to specify which buffer to return the size of.
2177
2178+++
2179** The calendar motion commands now run the normal hook
2180calendar-move-hook after moving point.
2181
2182+++
2183** The new variable small-temporary-file-directory specifies a
2184directory to use for creating temporary files that are likely to be
2185small. (Certain Emacs features use this directory.) If
2186small-temporary-file-directory is nil, they use
2187temporary-file-directory instead.
2188
2189+++
2190** The variable `inhibit-modification-hooks', if non-nil, inhibits all
2191the hooks that track changes in the buffer. This affects
2192`before-change-functions' and `after-change-functions', as well as
2193hooks attached to text properties and overlay properties.
2194
2195+++
2196** assoc-delete-all is a new function that deletes all the
2197elements of an alist which have a particular value as the car.
2198
2199+++
2200** make-temp-file provides a more reliable way to create a temporary file.
2201
2202make-temp-file is used like make-temp-name, except that it actually
2203creates the file before it returns. This prevents a timing error,
2204ensuring that no other job can use the same name for a temporary file.
2205
2206+++
2207** New exclusive-open feature in `write-region'
2208
2209The optional seventh arg is now called MUSTBENEW. If non-nil, it insists
2210on a check for an existing file with the same name. If MUSTBENEW
2211is `excl', that means to get an error if the file already exists;
2212never overwrite. If MUSTBENEW is neither nil nor `excl', that means
2213ask for confirmation before overwriting, but do go ahead and
2214overwrite the file if the user gives confirmation.
2215
2216If the MUSTBENEW argument in `write-region' is `excl',
2217that means to use a special feature in the `open' system call
2218to get an error if the file exists at that time.
2219The error reported is `file-already-exists'.
2220
2221+++
2222** Function `format' now handles text properties.
2223
2224Text properties of the format string are applied to the result string.
2225If the result string is longer than the format string, text properties
2226ending at the end of the format string are extended to the end of the
2227result string.
2228
2229Text properties from string arguments are applied to the result
2230string where arguments appear in the result string.
2231
2232Example:
2233
2234 (let ((s1 "hello, %s")
2235 (s2 "world"))
2236 (put-text-property 0 (length s1) 'face 'bold s1)
2237 (put-text-property 0 (length s2) 'face 'italic s2)
b246b1f6 2238 (format s1 s2))
a933dad1
DL
2239
2240results in a bold-face string with an italic `world' at the end.
2241
2242+++
2243** Messages can now be displayed with text properties.
2244
2245Text properties are handled as described above for function `format'.
2246The following example displays a bold-face message with an italic
2247argument in it.
2248
2249 (let ((msg "hello, %s!")
2250 (arg "world"))
2251 (put-text-property 0 (length msg) 'face 'bold msg)
2252 (put-text-property 0 (length arg) 'face 'italic arg)
2253 (message msg arg))
2254
2255+++
2256** Sound support
2257
2258Emacs supports playing sound files on GNU/Linux and the free BSDs
2259(Voxware driver and native BSD driver, aka as Luigi's driver).
2260
2261Currently supported file formats are RIFF-WAVE (*.wav) and Sun Audio
2262(*.au). You must configure Emacs with the option `--with-sound=yes'
2263to enable sound support.
2264
2265Sound files can be played by calling (play-sound SOUND). SOUND is a
2266list of the form `(sound PROPERTY...)'. The function is only defined
2267when sound support is present for the system on which Emacs runs. The
2268functions runs `play-sound-functions' with one argument which is the
2269sound to play, before playing the sound.
2270
2271The following sound properties are supported:
2272
2273- `:file FILE'
2274
2275FILE is a file name. If FILE isn't an absolute name, it will be
2276searched relative to `data-directory'.
2277
6fb40beb
GM
2278- `:data DATA'
2279
2280DATA is a string containing sound data. Either :file or :data
2281may be present, but not both.
2282
a933dad1
DL
2283- `:volume VOLUME'
2284
2285VOLUME must be an integer in the range 0..100 or a float in the range
22860..1. This property is optional.
2287
2288Other properties are ignored.
2289
2290** `multimedia' is a new Finder keyword and Custom group.
356673d4
DL
2291
2292** keywordp is a new predicate to test efficiently for an object being
2293a keyword symbol.
fc91dc2d
GM
2294
2295** Changes to garbage collection
2296
2297*** The function garbage-collect now additionally returns the number
2298of live and free strings.
2299
2300*** There is a new variable `strings-consed' holding the number of
2301strings that have been consed so far.
2302
a933dad1 2303\f
04545643
GM
2304* Lisp-level Display features added after release 2.6 of the Emacs
2305Lisp Manual
2306
9a8d84ca
DL
2307+++
2308** Help strings in menu items are now used to provide `help-echo' text.
2c69ced2
GM
2309
2310** The function `image-size' can be used to determine the size of an
2311image.
2312
2313- Function: image-size SPEC &optional PIXELS FRAME
2314
2315Return the size of an image as a pair (WIDTH . HEIGHT).
2316
2317SPEC is an image specification. PIXELS non-nil means return sizes
2318measured in pixels, otherwise return sizes measured in canonical
2319character units (fractions of the width/height of the frame's default
2320font). FRAME is the frame on which the image will be displayed.
2321FRAME nil or omitted means use the selected frame.
2322
0b8a3a6d
DL
2323** The function `find-image' can be used to find a usable image
2324satisfying one of a list of specifications.
2325
2326+++
2327** The STRING argument of `put-image' and `insert-image' is now
2328optional.
2329
04545643
GM
2330** Image specifications may contain the property `:ascent center'.
2331
2332When this property is specified, the image is vertically centered
2333around a centerline which would be the vertical center of text drawn
2334at the position of the image, in the manner specified by the text
2335properties and overlays that apply to the image.
2336
2337\f
a933dad1
DL
2338* New Lisp-level Display features in Emacs 21.1
2339
2340Note that +++ before an item means the Lisp manual has been updated.
2341--- means that I have decided it does not need to be in the Lisp manual.
2342When you add a new item, please add it without either +++ or ---
2343so I will know I still need to look at it -- rms.
2344
f6d3257b
GM
2345** The function tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors can be used
2346to make Emacs avoid displaying text with bold black foreground on TTYs.
2347
2348Some terminals, notably PC consoles, emulate bold text by displaying
2349text in brighter colors. On such a console, a bold black foreground
2350is displayed in a gray color. If this turns out to be hard to read on
2351your monitor---the problem occurred with the mode line on
2352laptops---you can instruct Emacs to ignore the text's boldness, and to
2353just display it black instead.
2354
2355This situation can't be detected automatically. You will have to put
2356a line like
2357
2358 (tty-suppress-bold-inverse-default-colors t)
2359
2360in your `.emacs'.
2361
a933dad1
DL
2362** New face implementation.
2363
2364Emacs faces have been reimplemented from scratch. They don't use XLFD
2365font names anymore and face merging now works as expected.
2366
2367+++
2368*** New faces.
2369
2370Each face can specify the following display attributes:
2371
2372 1. Font family or fontset alias name.
79214ddf 2373
a933dad1
DL
2374 2. Relative proportionate width, aka character set width or set
2375 width (swidth), e.g. `semi-compressed'.
79214ddf 2376
a933dad1 2377 3. Font height in 1/10pt
79214ddf 2378
a933dad1 2379 4. Font weight, e.g. `bold'.
79214ddf 2380
a933dad1 2381 5. Font slant, e.g. `italic'.
79214ddf 2382
a933dad1 2383 6. Foreground color.
79214ddf 2384
a933dad1
DL
2385 7. Background color.
2386
2387 8. Whether or not characters should be underlined, and in what color.
2388
2389 9. Whether or not characters should be displayed in inverse video.
2390
2391 10. A background stipple, a bitmap.
2392
2393 11. Whether or not characters should be overlined, and in what color.
2394
2395 12. Whether or not characters should be strike-through, and in what
2396 color.
2397
2398 13. Whether or not a box should be drawn around characters, its
2399 color, the width of the box lines, and 3D appearance.
2400
2401Faces are frame-local by nature because Emacs allows to define the
2402same named face (face names are symbols) differently for different
2403frames. Each frame has an alist of face definitions for all named
2404faces. The value of a named face in such an alist is a Lisp vector
2405with the symbol `face' in slot 0, and a slot for each each of the face
2406attributes mentioned above.
2407
2408There is also a global face alist `face-new-frame-defaults'. Face
2409definitions from this list are used to initialize faces of newly
2410created frames.
79214ddf 2411
a933dad1
DL
2412A face doesn't have to specify all attributes. Those not specified
2413have a nil value. Faces specifying all attributes are called
2414`fully-specified'.
2415
2416+++
2417*** Face merging.
2418
2419The display style of a given character in the text is determined by
2420combining several faces. This process is called `face merging'. Any
2421aspect of the display style that isn't specified by overlays or text
2422properties is taken from the `default' face. Since it is made sure
2423that the default face is always fully-specified, face merging always
2424results in a fully-specified face.
2425
2426+++
2427*** Face realization.
2428
2429After all face attributes for a character have been determined by
2430merging faces of that character, that face is `realized'. The
2431realization process maps face attributes to what is physically
2432available on the system where Emacs runs. The result is a `realized
2433face' in form of an internal structure which is stored in the face
2434cache of the frame on which it was realized.
2435
2436Face realization is done in the context of the charset of the
2437character to display because different fonts and encodings are used
2438for different charsets. In other words, for characters of different
2439charsets, different realized faces are needed to display them.
2440
2441Except for composite characters, faces are always realized for a
2442specific character set and contain a specific font, even if the face
2443being realized specifies a fontset. The reason is that the result of
2444the new font selection stage is better than what can be done with
2445statically defined font name patterns in fontsets.
2446
2447In unibyte text, Emacs' charsets aren't applicable; function
2448`char-charset' reports ASCII for all characters, including those >
24490x7f. The X registry and encoding of fonts to use is determined from
2450the variable `face-default-registry' in this case. The variable is
2451initialized at Emacs startup time from the font the user specified for
2452Emacs.
2453
2454Currently all unibyte text, i.e. all buffers with
2455`enable-multibyte-characters' nil are displayed with fonts of the same
2456registry and encoding `face-default-registry'. This is consistent
2457with the fact that languages can also be set globally, only.
2458
2459++++
2460**** Clearing face caches.
2461
2462The Lisp function `clear-face-cache' can be called to clear face caches
2463on all frames. If called with a non-nil argument, it will also unload
2464unused fonts.
2465
2466+++
2467*** Font selection.
79214ddf 2468
a933dad1
DL
2469Font selection tries to find the best available matching font for a
2470given (charset, face) combination. This is done slightly differently
2471for faces specifying a fontset, or a font family name.
2472
2473If the face specifies a fontset name, that fontset determines a
2474pattern for fonts of the given charset. If the face specifies a font
2475family, a font pattern is constructed. Charset symbols have a
2476property `x-charset-registry' for that purpose that maps a charset to
2477an XLFD registry and encoding in the font pattern constructed.
2478
2479Available fonts on the system on which Emacs runs are then matched
2480against the font pattern. The result of font selection is the best
2481match for the given face attributes in this font list.
2482
2483Font selection can be influenced by the user.
2484
2485The user can specify the relative importance he gives the face
2486attributes width, height, weight, and slant by setting
2487face-font-selection-order (faces.el) to a list of face attribute
2488names. The default is (:width :height :weight :slant), and means
2489that font selection first tries to find a good match for the font
2490width specified by a face, then---within fonts with that width---tries
2491to find a best match for the specified font height, etc.
2492
2493Setting `face-alternative-font-family-alist' allows the user to
2494specify alternative font families to try if a family specified by a
2495face doesn't exist.
2496
2497+++
2498**** Scalable fonts
2499
2500Emacs can make use of scalable fonts but doesn't do so by default,
2501since the use of too many or too big scalable fonts may crash XFree86
2502servers.
2503
2504To enable scalable font use, set the variable
b246b1f6 2505`scalable-fonts-allowed'. A value of nil, the default, means never use
a933dad1
DL
2506scalable fonts. A value of t means any scalable font may be used.
2507Otherwise, the value must be a list of regular expressions. A
2508scalable font may then be used if it matches a regular expression from
2509that list. Example:
2510
2511 (setq scalable-fonts-allowed '("muleindian-2$"))
2512
2513allows the use of scalable fonts with registry `muleindian-2'.
2514
2515+++
2516*** Functions and variables related to font selection.
2517
2518- Function: x-family-fonts &optional FAMILY FRAME
2519
2520Return a list of available fonts of family FAMILY on FRAME. If FAMILY
2521is omitted or nil, list all families. Otherwise, FAMILY must be a
2522string, possibly containing wildcards `?' and `*'.
2523
2524If FRAME is omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Each element of
2525the result is a vector [FAMILY WIDTH POINT-SIZE WEIGHT SLANT FIXED-P
2526FULL REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING]. FAMILY is the font family name.
2527POINT-SIZE is the size of the font in 1/10 pt. WIDTH, WEIGHT, and
2528SLANT are symbols describing the width, weight and slant of the font.
2529These symbols are the same as for face attributes. FIXED-P is non-nil
2530if the font is fixed-pitch. FULL is the full name of the font, and
2531REGISTRY-AND-ENCODING is a string giving the registry and encoding of
2532the font. The result list is sorted according to the current setting
2533of the face font sort order.
2534
79214ddf 2535- Function: x-font-family-list
a933dad1
DL
2536
2537Return a list of available font families on FRAME. If FRAME is
2538omitted or nil, use the selected frame. Value is a list of conses
2539(FAMILY . FIXED-P) where FAMILY is a font family, and FIXED-P is
2540non-nil if fonts of that family are fixed-pitch.
2541
2542- Variable: font-list-limit
2543
2544Limit for font matching. If an integer > 0, font matching functions
2545won't load more than that number of fonts when searching for a
2546matching font. The default is currently 100.
2547
2548+++
2549*** Setting face attributes.
2550
2551For the most part, the new face implementation is interface-compatible
2552with the old one. Old face attribute related functions are now
2553implemented in terms of the new functions `set-face-attribute' and
2554`face-attribute'.
2555
2556Face attributes are identified by their names which are keyword
2557symbols. All attributes can be set to `unspecified'.
2558
2559The following attributes are recognized:
2560
2561`:family'
2562
2563VALUE must be a string specifying the font family, e.g. ``courier'',
2564or a fontset alias name. If a font family is specified, wild-cards `*'
2565and `?' are allowed.
2566
2567`:width'
2568
2569VALUE specifies the relative proportionate width of the font to use.
2570It must be one of the symbols `ultra-condensed', `extra-condensed',
2571`condensed', `semi-condensed', `normal', `semi-expanded', `expanded',
2572`extra-expanded', or `ultra-expanded'.
2573
2574`:height'
2575
2576VALUE must be an integer specifying the height of the font to use in
25771/10 pt.
2578
2579`:weight'
2580
2581VALUE specifies the weight of the font to use. It must be one of the
2582symbols `ultra-bold', `extra-bold', `bold', `semi-bold', `normal',
2583`semi-light', `light', `extra-light', `ultra-light'.
2584
2585`:slant'
2586
2587VALUE specifies the slant of the font to use. It must be one of the
2588symbols `italic', `oblique', `normal', `reverse-italic', or
2589`reverse-oblique'.
2590
2591`:foreground', `:background'
2592
2593VALUE must be a color name, a string.
2594
2595`:underline'
2596
2597VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be underlined. If
2598VALUE is t, underline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is
2599a string, underline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly
2600don't underline.
2601
2602`:overline'
2603
2604VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be overlined. If
2605VALUE is t, overline with foreground color of the face. If VALUE is a
2606string, overline with that color. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't
2607overline.
2608
2609`:strike-through'
2610
2611VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be drawn with a line
2612striking through them. If VALUE is t, use the foreground color of the
2613face. If VALUE is a string, strike-through with that color. If VALUE
2614is nil, explicitly don't strike through.
2615
2616`:box'
2617
2618VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should have a box drawn
2619around them. If VALUE is nil, explicitly don't draw boxes. If
2620VALUE is t, draw a box with lines of width 1 in the foreground color
2621of the face. If VALUE is a string, the string must be a color name,
2622and the box is drawn in that color with a line width of 1. Otherwise,
2623VALUE must be a property list of the form `(:line-width WIDTH
2624:color COLOR :style STYLE)'. If a keyword/value pair is missing from
2625the property list, a default value will be used for the value, as
2626specified below. WIDTH specifies the width of the lines to draw; it
2627defaults to 1. COLOR is the name of the color to draw in, default is
2628the foreground color of the face for simple boxes, and the background
2629color of the face for 3D boxes. STYLE specifies whether a 3D box
2630should be draw. If STYLE is `released-button', draw a box looking
2631like a released 3D button. If STYLE is `pressed-button' draw a box
2632that appears like a pressed button. If STYLE is nil, the default if
2633the property list doesn't contain a style specification, draw a 2D
2634box.
2635
2636`:inverse-video'
2637
2638VALUE specifies whether characters in FACE should be displayed in
2639inverse video. VALUE must be one of t or nil.
2640
2641`:stipple'
2642
2643If VALUE is a string, it must be the name of a file of pixmap data.
2644The directories listed in the `x-bitmap-file-path' variable are
2645searched. Alternatively, VALUE may be a list of the form (WIDTH
2646HEIGHT DATA) where WIDTH and HEIGHT are the size in pixels, and DATA
2647is a string containing the raw bits of the bitmap. VALUE nil means
2648explicitly don't use a stipple pattern.
2649
2650For convenience, attributes `:family', `:width', `:height', `:weight',
2651and `:slant' may also be set in one step from an X font name:
2652
2653`:font'
2654
2655Set font-related face attributes from VALUE. VALUE must be a valid
2656XLFD font name. If it is a font name pattern, the first matching font
2657is used--this is for compatibility with the behavior of previous
2658versions of Emacs.
2659
2660For compatibility with Emacs 20, keywords `:bold' and `:italic' can
2661be used to specify that a bold or italic font should be used. VALUE
2662must be t or nil in that case. A value of `unspecified' is not allowed."
2663
2664Please see also the documentation of `set-face-attribute' and
2665`defface'.
2666
2667*** Face attributes and X resources
2668
2669The following X resource names can be used to set face attributes
2670from X resources:
2671
2672 Face attribute X resource class
2673-----------------------------------------------------------------------
2674 :family attributeFamily . Face.AttributeFamily
2675 :width attributeWidth Face.AttributeWidth
2676 :height attributeHeight Face.AttributeHeight
2677 :weight attributeWeight Face.AttributeWeight
2678 :slant attributeSlant Face.AttributeSlant
2679 foreground attributeForeground Face.AttributeForeground
2680 :background attributeBackground . Face.AttributeBackground
2681 :overline attributeOverline Face.AttributeOverline
2682 :strike-through attributeStrikeThrough Face.AttributeStrikeThrough
2683 :box attributeBox Face.AttributeBox
2684 :underline attributeUnderline Face.AttributeUnderline
2685 :inverse-video attributeInverse Face.AttributeInverse
2686 :stipple attributeStipple Face.AttributeStipple
79214ddf 2687 or attributeBackgroundPixmap
a933dad1
DL
2688 Face.AttributeBackgroundPixmap
2689 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2690 :bold attributeBold Face.AttributeBold
2691 :italic attributeItalic . Face.AttributeItalic
2692 :font attributeFont Face.AttributeFont
2693
2694+++
2695*** Text property `face'.
2696
2697The value of the `face' text property can now be a single face
2698specification or a list of such specifications. Each face
2699specification can be
2700
27011. A symbol or string naming a Lisp face.
2702
27032. A property list of the form (KEYWORD VALUE ...) where each
2704 KEYWORD is a face attribute name, and VALUE is an appropriate value
2705 for that attribute. Please see the doc string of `set-face-attribute'
2706 for face attribute names.
2707
27083. Conses of the form (FOREGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) or
2709 (BACKGROUND-COLOR . COLOR) where COLOR is a color name. This is
2710 for compatibility with previous Emacs versions.
2711
2712+++
2713** Support functions for colors on text-only terminals.
2714
acf3ecb7
EZ
2715The function `tty-color-define' can be used to define colors for use
2716on TTY and MSDOS frames. It maps a color name to a color number on
2717the terminal. Emacs defines a couple of common color mappings by
a933dad1 2718default. You can get defined colors with a call to
acf3ecb7 2719`defined-colors'. The function `tty-color-clear' can be
a933dad1
DL
2720used to clear the mapping table.
2721
acf3ecb7
EZ
2722** Unified support for colors independent of frame type.
2723
2724The new functions `defined-colors', `color-defined-p', `color-values',
2725and `display-color-p' work for any type of frame. On frames whose
2726type is neither x nor w32, these functions transparently map X-style
2727color specifications to the closest colors supported by the frame
2728display. Lisp programs should use these new functions instead of the
2729old `x-defined-colors', `x-color-defined-p', `x-color-values', and
2730`x-display-color-p'. (The old function names are still available for
2731compatibility; they are now aliases of the new names.) Lisp programs
2732should no more look at the value of the variable window-system to
2733modify their color-related behavior.
2734
2735The primitives `color-gray-p' and `color-supported-p' also work for
2736any frame type.
2737
8a5719f0
EZ
2738** Platform-independent functions to describe display capabilities.
2739
2740The new functions `display-mouse-p', `display-popup-menus-p',
2741`display-graphic-p', `display-selections-p', `display-screens',
2742`display-pixel-width', `display-pixel-height', `display-mm-width',
2743`display-mm-height', `display-backing-store', `display-save-under',
2744`display-planes', `display-color-cells', `display-visual-class', and
2745`display-grayscale-p' describe the basic capabilities of a particular
2746display. Lisp programs should call these functions instead of testing
2747the value of the variables `window-system' or `system-type', or calling
2748platform-specific functions such as `x-display-pixel-width'.
2749
a933dad1
DL
2750+++
2751** The minibuffer prompt is now actually inserted in the minibuffer.
a933dad1 2752
463cac2d 2753This makes it possible to scroll through the prompt, if you want to.
a933dad1
DL
2754
2755The function minubuffer-prompt-end returns the current position of the
2756end of the minibuffer prompt, if the minibuffer is current.
2757Otherwise, it returns zero.
2758
463cac2d
GM
2759** New `field' abstraction in buffers.
2760
2761There is now code to support an abstraction called `fields' in emacs
2762buffers. A field is a contiguous region of text with the same `field'
59927f88 2763property (which can be a text property or an overlay).
463cac2d 2764
9a9dfda8 2765Many emacs functions, such as forward-word, forward-sentence,
463cac2d 2766forward-paragraph, beginning-of-line, etc., stop moving when they come
9a9dfda8 2767to the boundary between fields; beginning-of-line and end-of-line will
463cac2d 2768not let the point move past the field boundary, but other movement
fc7ac24f
GM
2769commands continue into the next field if repeated. Stopping at field
2770boundaries can be suppressed programmatically by binding
2771`inhibit-field-text-motion' to a non-nil value around calls to these
2772functions.
463cac2d
GM
2773
2774Now that the minibuffer prompt is inserted into the minibuffer, it is in
9a9dfda8 2775a separate field from the user-input part of the buffer, so that common
463cac2d 2776editing commands treat the user's text separately from the prompt.
a933dad1 2777
9a9dfda8
GM
2778The following functions are defined for operating on fields:
2779
59927f88 2780- Function: constrain-to-field NEW-POS OLD-POS &optional ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE ONLY-IN-LINE INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY
9a9dfda8
GM
2781
2782Return the position closest to NEW-POS that is in the same field as OLD-POS.
59927f88 2783
9a9dfda8
GM
2784A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
2785If NEW-POS is nil, then the current point is used instead, and set to the
2786constrained position if that is is different.
2787
2788If OLD-POS is at the boundary of two fields, then the allowable
2789positions for NEW-POS depends on the value of the optional argument
2790ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE: If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is nil, then NEW-POS is
59927f88 2791constrained to the field that has the same `field' char-property
9a9dfda8
GM
2792as any new characters inserted at OLD-POS, whereas if ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2793is non-nil, NEW-POS is constrained to the union of the two adjacent
59927f88
MB
2794fields. Additionally, if two fields are separated by another field with
2795the special value `boundary', then any point within this special field is
2796also considered to be `on the boundary'.
9a9dfda8
GM
2797
2798If the optional argument ONLY-IN-LINE is non-nil and constraining
2799NEW-POS would move it to a different line, NEW-POS is returned
2800unconstrained. This useful for commands that move by line, like
2801C-n or C-a, which should generally respect field boundaries
2802only in the case where they can still move to the right line.
2803
59927f88
MB
2804If the optional argument INHIBIT-CAPTURE-PROPERTY is non-nil, and OLD-POS has
2805a non-nil property of that name, then any field boundaries are ignored.
2806
2807Field boundaries are not noticed if `inhibit-field-text-motion' is non-nil.
2808
2809- Function: delete-field &optional POS
9a9dfda8 2810
59927f88 2811Delete the field surrounding POS.
9a9dfda8 2812A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2813If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
2814
2815- Function: field-beginning &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2816
2817Return the beginning of the field surrounding POS.
2818A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
2819If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
2820If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the beginning of its
9a9dfda8
GM
2821field, then the beginning of the *previous* field is returned.
2822
2823- Function: field-end &optional POS ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE
2824
2825Return the end of the field surrounding POS.
2826A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88
MB
2827If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
2828If ESCAPE-FROM-EDGE is non-nil and POS is at the end of its field,
9a9dfda8
GM
2829then the end of the *following* field is returned.
2830
2831- Function: field-string &optional POS
2832
2833Return the contents of the field surrounding POS as a string.
2834A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2835If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8
GM
2836
2837- Function: field-string-no-properties &optional POS
2838
2839Return the contents of the field around POS, without text-properties.
2840A field is a region of text with the same `field' property.
59927f88 2841If POS is nil, the value of point is used for POS.
9a9dfda8 2842
a933dad1
DL
2843+++
2844** Image support.
2845
2846Emacs can now display images. Images are inserted into text by giving
2847strings or buffer text a `display' text property containing one of
2848(AREA IMAGE) or IMAGE. The display of the `display' property value
2849replaces the display of the characters having that property.
2850
2851If the property value has the form (AREA IMAGE), AREA must be one of
2852`(margin left-margin)', `(margin right-margin)' or `(margin nil)'. If
2853AREA is `(margin nil)', IMAGE will be displayed in the text area of a
2854window, otherwise it will be displayed in the left or right marginal
2855area.
2856
2857IMAGE is an image specification.
2858
2859*** Image specifications
2860
2861Image specifications are lists of the form `(image PROPS)' where PROPS
2862is a property list whose keys are keyword symbols. Each
2863specifications must contain a property `:type TYPE' with TYPE being a
35a5514b
GM
2864symbol specifying the image type, e.g. `xbm'. Properties not
2865described below are ignored.
a933dad1
DL
2866
2867The following is a list of properties all image types share.
2868
2869`:ascent ASCENT'
2870
576da55d
GM
2871ASCENT must be a number in the range 0..100, or the symbol `center'.
2872If it is a number, it specifies the percentage of the image's height
5d94f558 2873to use for its ascent.
576da55d
GM
2874
2875If not specified, ASCENT defaults to the value 50 which means that the
2876image will be centered with the base line of the row it appears in.
2877
5d94f558 2878If ASCENT is `center' the image is vertically centered around a
04545643
GM
2879centerline which is the vertical center of text drawn at the position
2880of the image, in the manner specified by the text properties and
2881overlays that apply to the image.
a933dad1
DL
2882
2883`:margin MARGIN'
2884
79214ddf 2885MARGIN must be a number >= 0 specifying how many pixels to put as
a933dad1
DL
2886margin around the image. Default is 0.
2887
2888`:relief RELIEF'
2889
2890RELIEF is analogous to the `:relief' attribute of faces. Puts a relief
2891around an image.
2892
2893`:algorithm ALGO'
2894
2895Apply an image algorithm to the image before displaying it. ALGO must
2896be a symbol specifying the algorithm. Currently only `laplace' is
2897supported which applies a Laplace edge detection algorithm to an image
2898which is intended to display images "disabled."
2899
2900`:heuristic-mask BG'
2901
2902If BG is not nil, build a clipping mask for the image, so that the
2903background of a frame is visible behind the image. If BG is t,
2904determine the background color of the image by looking at the 4
2905corners of the image, assuming the most frequently occuring color from
2906the corners is the background color of the image. Otherwise, BG must
2907be a list `(RED GREEN BLUE)' specifying the color to assume for the
2908background of the image.
2909
2910`:file FILE'
2911
2912Load image from FILE. If FILE is not absolute after expanding it,
2913search for the image in `data-directory'. Some image types support
2914building images from data. When this is done, no `:file' property
2915may be present in the image specification.
2916
518df5c4
GM
2917`:data DATA'
2918
2919Get image data from DATA. (As of this writing, this is not yet
2920supported for image type `postscript'). Either :file or :data may be
2921present in an image specification, but not both. All image types
2922support strings as DATA, some types allow additional types of DATA.
2923
a933dad1
DL
2924*** Supported image types
2925
b246b1f6 2926**** XBM, image type `xbm'.
a933dad1
DL
2927
2928XBM images don't require an external library. Additional image
2929properties supported are
2930
2931`:foreground FG'
2932
2933FG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default
2934is the frame's foreground.
2935
2936`:background FG'
2937
2938BG must be a string specifying the image foreground color. Default is
2939the frame's background color.
2940
2941XBM images can be constructed from data instead of file. In this
2942case, the image specification must contain the following properties
2943instead of a `:file' property.
2944
2945`:width WIDTH'
2946
2947WIDTH specifies the width of the image in pixels.
2948
2949`:height HEIGHT'
2950
2951HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pixels.
2952
2953`:data DATA'
2954
2955DATA must be either
2956
2957 1. a string large enough to hold the bitmap data, i.e. it must
2958 have a size >= (WIDTH + 7) / 8 * HEIGHT
2959
2960 2. a bool-vector of size >= WIDTH * HEIGHT
2961
2962 3. a vector of strings or bool-vectors, one for each line of the
2963 bitmap.
2964
c76e04a8
GM
2965 4. a string that's an in-memory XBM file. Neither width nor
2966 height may be specified in this case because these are defined
2967 in the file.
2968
a933dad1
DL
2969**** XPM, image type `xpm'
2970
2971XPM images require the external library `libXpm', package
2972`xpm-3.4k.tar.gz', version 3.4k or later. Make sure the library is
2973found when Emacs is configured by supplying appropriate paths via
2974`--x-includes' and `--x-libraries'.
2975
2976Additional image properties supported are:
2977
2978`:color-symbols SYMBOLS'
2979
2980SYMBOLS must be a list of pairs (NAME . COLOR), with NAME being the
2981name of color as it appears in an XPM file, and COLOR being an X color
2982name.
2983
2984XPM images can be built from memory instead of files. In that case,
2985add a `:data' property instead of a `:file' property.
2986
a933dad1
DL
2987The XPM library uses libz in its implementation so that it is able
2988to display compressed images.
2989
2990**** PBM, image type `pbm'
2991
2992PBM images don't require an external library. Color, gray-scale and
2993mono images are supported. There are no additional image properties
2994defined.
2995
2996**** JPEG, image type `jpeg'
2997
2998Support for JPEG images requires the external library `libjpeg',
3bd37feb
GM
2999package `jpegsrc.v6a.tar.gz', or later. Additional image properties
3000are:
3001
a933dad1
DL
3002**** TIFF, image type `tiff'
3003
3004Support for TIFF images requires the external library `libtiff',
3005package `tiff-v3.4-tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3006properties defined.
3007
3008**** GIF, image type `gif'
3009
3010Support for GIF images requires the external library `libungif', package
3011`libungif-4.1.0', or later.
3012
3013Additional image properties supported are:
3014
3015`:index INDEX'
3016
3017INDEX must be an integer >= 0. Load image number INDEX from a
3018multi-image GIF file. An error is signalled if INDEX is too large.
3019
3020This could be used to implement limited support for animated GIFs.
3021For example, the following function displays a multi-image GIF file
3022at point-min in the current buffer, switching between sub-images
3023every 0.1 seconds.
3024
3025(defun show-anim (file max)
3026 "Display multi-image GIF file FILE which contains MAX subimages."
3027 (display-anim (current-buffer) file 0 max t))
3028
3029(defun display-anim (buffer file idx max first-time)
3030 (when (= idx max)
3031 (setq idx 0))
518df5c4 3032 (let ((img (create-image file nil nil :index idx)))
a933dad1
DL
3033 (save-excursion
3034 (set-buffer buffer)
3035 (goto-char (point-min))
3036 (unless first-time (delete-char 1))
3037 (insert-image img "x"))
3038 (run-with-timer 0.1 nil 'display-anim buffer file (1+ idx) max nil)))
3039
3040**** PNG, image type `png'
3041
3042Support for PNG images requires the external library `libpng',
3043package `libpng-1.0.2.tar.gz', or later. There are no additional image
3044properties defined.
3045
3046**** Ghostscript, image type `postscript'.
3047
3048Additional image properties supported are:
3049
3050`:pt-width WIDTH'
3051
3052WIDTH is width of the image in pt (1/72 inch). WIDTH must be an
b246b1f6 3053integer. This is a required property.
a933dad1
DL
3054
3055`:pt-height HEIGHT'
3056
3057HEIGHT specifies the height of the image in pt (1/72 inch). HEIGHT
b246b1f6 3058must be a integer. This is an required property.
a933dad1
DL
3059
3060`:bounding-box BOX'
3061
3062BOX must be a list or vector of 4 integers giving the bounding box of
3063the PS image, analogous to the `BoundingBox' comment found in PS
3064files. This is an required property.
3065
3066Part of the Ghostscript interface is implemented in Lisp. See
3067lisp/gs.el.
3068
3069*** Lisp interface.
3070
79214ddf
FP
3071The variable `image-types' contains a list of those image types
3072which are supported in the current configuration.
a933dad1
DL
3073
3074Images are stored in an image cache and removed from the cache when
3075they haven't been displayed for `image-cache-eviction-delay seconds.
3076The function `clear-image-cache' can be used to clear the image cache
084cec2f
GM
3077manually. Images in the cache are compared with `equal', i.e. all
3078images with `equal' specifications share the same image.
a933dad1
DL
3079
3080*** Simplified image API, image.el
3081
3082The new Lisp package image.el contains functions that simplify image
3083creation and putting images into text. The function `create-image'
3084can be used to create images. The macro `defimage' can be used to
3085define an image based on available image types. The functions
3086`put-image' and `insert-image' can be used to insert an image into a
3087buffer.
3088
3089+++
3090** Display margins.
3091
3092Windows can now have margins which are used for special text
3093and images.
3094
3095To give a window margins, either set the buffer-local variables
3096`left-margin-width' and `right-margin-width', or call
3097`set-window-margins'. The function `window-margins' can be used to
3098obtain the current settings. To make `left-margin-width' and
3099`right-margin-width' take effect, you must set them before displaying
3100the buffer in a window, or use `set-window-buffer' to force an update
3101of the display margins.
3102
3103You can put text in margins by giving it a `display' text property
3104containing a pair of the form `(LOCATION . VALUE)', where LOCATION is
3105one of `left-margin' or `right-margin' or nil. VALUE can be either a
3106string, an image specification or a stretch specification (see later
3107in this file).
3108
3109+++
3110** Help display
3111
3112Emacs displays short help messages in the echo area, when the mouse
3113moves over a tool-bar item or a piece of text that has a text property
3114`help-echo'. This feature also applies to strings in the mode line
3115that have a `help-echo' property.
3116
9662da0b 3117If the value of the `help-echo' property is a function, that function
85a8aca9 3118is called with three arguments WINDOW, OBJECT and POSITION. WINDOW is
c20aeb83
GM
3119the window in which the help was found.
3120
3121If OBJECT is a buffer, POS is the position in the buffer where the
3122`help-echo' text property was found.
3123
3124If OBJECT is an overlay, that overlay has a `help-echo' property, and
3125POS is the position in the overlay's buffer under the mouse.
3126
3127If OBJECT is a string (an overlay string or a string displayed with
5ed8d5af 3128the `display' property), POS is the position in that string under the
c20aeb83 3129mouse.
d5aa31d8 3130
9662da0b
GM
3131If the value of the `help-echo' property is neither a function nor a
3132string, it is evaluated to obtain a help string.
3133
3134For tool-bar and menu-bar items, their key definition is used to
3135determine the help to display. If their definition contains a
3136property `:help FORM', FORM is evaluated to determine the help string.
3137For tool-bar items without a help form, the caption of the item is
3138used as help string.
a933dad1
DL
3139
3140The hook `show-help-function' can be set to a function that displays
f0298744
DL
3141the help string differently. For example, enabling a tooltip window
3142causes the help display to appear there instead of in the echo area.
a933dad1
DL
3143
3144+++
3145** Vertical fractional scrolling.
3146
3147The display of text in windows can be scrolled smoothly in pixels.
3148This is useful, for example, for making parts of large images visible.
3149
3150The function `window-vscroll' returns the current value of vertical
3151scrolling, a non-negative fraction of the canonical character height.
3152The function `set-window-vscroll' can be used to set the vertical
3153scrolling value. Here is an example of how these function might be
3154used.
3155
79214ddf
FP
3156 (global-set-key [A-down]
3157 #'(lambda ()
a933dad1 3158 (interactive)
79214ddf 3159 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1 3160 (+ 0.5 (window-vscroll)))))
79214ddf 3161 (global-set-key [A-up]
a933dad1
DL
3162 #'(lambda ()
3163 (interactive)
79214ddf 3164 (set-window-vscroll (selected-window)
a933dad1
DL
3165 (- (window-vscroll) 0.5)))))
3166
3167+++
3168** New hook `fontification-functions'.
3169
3170Functions from `fontification-functions' are called from redisplay
3171when it encounters a region of text that is not yet fontified. This
3172variable automatically becomes buffer-local when set. Each function
3173is called with one argument, POS.
3174
3175At least one of the hook functions should fontify one or more
3176characters starting at POS in the current buffer. It should mark them
3177as fontified by giving them a non-nil value of the `fontified' text
3178property. It may be reasonable for these functions to check for the
3179`fontified' property and not put it back on, but they do not have to.
3180
3181+++
3182** Tool bar support.
3183
3184Emacs supports a tool bar at the top of a frame under X. The frame
3185parameter `tool-bar-lines' (X resource "toolBar", class "ToolBar")
3186controls how may lines to reserve for the tool bar. A zero value
3187suppresses the tool bar. If the value is non-zero and
3188`auto-resize-tool-bars' is non-nil the tool bar's size will be changed
3189automatically so that all tool bar items are visible.
3190
3191*** Tool bar item definitions
3192
3193Tool bar items are defined using `define-key' with a prefix-key
3194`tool-bar'. For example `(define-key global-map [tool-bar item1] ITEM)'
3195where ITEM is a list `(menu-item CAPTION BINDING PROPS...)'.
79214ddf 3196
a933dad1
DL
3197CAPTION is the caption of the item, If it's not a string, it is
3198evaluated to get a string. The caption is currently not displayed in
3199the tool bar, but it is displayed if the item doesn't have a `:help'
3200property (see below).
79214ddf 3201
a933dad1
DL
3202BINDING is the tool bar item's binding. Tool bar items with keymaps as
3203binding are currently ignored.
3204
3205The following properties are recognized:
3206
3207`:enable FORM'.
79214ddf 3208
a933dad1
DL
3209FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is enabled
3210or disabled.
79214ddf 3211
a933dad1 3212`:visible FORM'
79214ddf 3213
a933dad1 3214FORM is evaluated and specifies whether the tool bar item is displayed.
79214ddf 3215
a933dad1
DL
3216`:filter FUNCTION'
3217
3218FUNCTION is called with one parameter, the same list BINDING in which
3219FUNCTION is specified as the filter. The value FUNCTION returns is
3220used instead of BINDING to display this item.
79214ddf 3221
a933dad1
DL
3222`:button (TYPE SELECTED)'
3223
3224TYPE must be one of `:radio' or `:toggle'. SELECTED is evaluated
3225and specifies whether the button is selected (pressed) or not.
79214ddf 3226
a933dad1
DL
3227`:image IMAGES'
3228
3229IMAGES is either a single image specification or a vector of four
3230image specifications. If it is a vector, this table lists the
3231meaning of each of the four elements:
3232
3233 Index Use when item is
3234 ----------------------------------------
3235 0 enabled and selected
3236 1 enabled and deselected
3237 2 disabled and selected
3238 3 disabled and deselected
79214ddf 3239
4ba7246d
GM
3240If IMAGE is a single image specification, a Laplace edge-detection
3241algorithm is used on that image to draw the image in disabled state.
3242
a933dad1 3243`:help HELP-STRING'.
79214ddf 3244
a933dad1
DL
3245Gives a help string to display for the tool bar item. This help
3246is displayed when the mouse is moved over the item.
3247
3248*** Tool-bar-related variables.
3249
3250If `auto-resize-tool-bar' is non-nil, the tool bar will automatically
3251resize to show all defined tool bar items. It will never grow larger
3252than 1/4 of the frame's size.
3253
79214ddf 3254If `auto-raise-tool-bar-buttons' is non-nil, tool bar buttons will be
a933dad1
DL
3255raised when the mouse moves over them.
3256
3257You can add extra space between tool bar items by setting
3258`tool-bar-button-margin' to a positive integer specifying a number of
3259pixels. Default is 1.
3260
3261You can change the shadow thickness of tool bar buttons by setting
3262`tool-bar-button-relief' to an integer. Default is 3.
3263
3264*** Tool-bar clicks with modifiers.
3265
3266You can bind commands to clicks with control, shift, meta etc. on
79214ddf 3267a tool bar item. If
a933dad1
DL
3268
3269 (define-key global-map [tool-bar shell]
3270 '(menu-item "Shell" shell
3271 :image (image :type xpm :file "shell.xpm")))
3272
3273is the original tool bar item definition, then
3274
3275 (define-key global-map [tool-bar S-shell] 'some-command)
3276
3277makes a binding to run `some-command' for a shifted click on the same
3278item.
3279
3280** Mode line changes.
3281
3282+++
3283*** Mouse-sensitive mode line.
3284
3285The mode line can be made mouse-sensitive by displaying strings there
3286that have a `local-map' text property. There are three ways to display
3287a string with a `local-map' property in the mode line.
3288
32891. The mode line spec contains a variable whose string value has
3290a `local-map' text property.
3291
32922. The mode line spec contains a format specifier (e.g. `%12b'), and
3293that format specifier has a `local-map' property.
3294
32953. The mode line spec contains a list containing `:eval FORM'. FORM
3296is evaluated. If the result is a string, and that string has a
3297`local-map' property.
3298
3299The same mechanism is used to determine the `face' and `help-echo'
3300properties of strings in the mode line. See `bindings.el' for an
3301example.
3302
54522c9f
GM
3303*** If a mode line element has the form `(:eval FORM)', FORM is
3304evaluated and the result is used as mode line element.
3305
a933dad1
DL
3306+++
3307*** You can suppress mode-line display by setting the buffer-local
3308variable mode-line-format to nil.
3309
3310+++
3311*** A headerline can now be displayed at the top of a window.
3312
3313This mode line's contents are controlled by the new variable
3314`header-line-format' and `default-header-line-format' which are
3315completely analogous to `mode-line-format' and
3316`default-mode-line-format'. A value of nil means don't display a top
3317line.
3318
3319The appearance of top mode lines is controlled by the face
3320`header-line'.
3321
3322The function `coordinates-in-window-p' returns `header-line' for a
3323position in the header-line.
3324
3325+++
3326** Text property `display'
3327
3328The `display' text property is used to insert images into text, and
3329also control other aspects of how text displays. The value of the
3330`display' property should be a display specification, as described
3331below, or a list or vector containing display specifications.
3332
3333*** Variable width and height spaces
3334
3335To display a space of fractional width or height, use a display
3336specification of the form `(LOCATION STRECH)'. If LOCATION is
3337`(margin left-margin)', the space is displayed in the left marginal
3338area, if it is `(margin right-margin)', it is displayed in the right
3339marginal area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the space is
3340displayed in the text. In the latter case you can also use the
3341simpler form STRETCH as property value.
3342
3343The stretch specification STRETCH itself is a list of the form `(space
3344PROPS)', where PROPS is a property list which can contain the
3345properties described below.
3346
3347The display of the fractional space replaces the display of the
3348characters having the `display' property.
3349
3350- :width WIDTH
3351
3352Specifies that the space width should be WIDTH times the normal
3353character width. WIDTH can be an integer or floating point number.
3354
3355- :relative-width FACTOR
3356
3357Specifies that the width of the stretch should be computed from the
3358first character in a group of consecutive characters that have the
3359same `display' property. The computation is done by multiplying the
3360width of that character by FACTOR.
3361
3362- :align-to HPOS
3363
3364Specifies that the space should be wide enough to reach HPOS. The
3365value HPOS is measured in units of the normal character width.
3366
3367Exactly one of the above properties should be used.
3368
3369- :height HEIGHT
3370
3371Specifies the height of the space, as HEIGHT, measured in terms of the
3372normal line height.
3373
3374- :relative-height FACTOR
3375
3376The height of the space is computed as the product of the height
3377of the text having the `display' property and FACTOR.
3378
3379- :ascent ASCENT
3380
3381Specifies that ASCENT percent of the height of the stretch should be
3382used for the ascent of the stretch, i.e. for the part above the
3383baseline. The value of ASCENT must be a non-negative number less or
3384equal to 100.
3385
3386You should not use both `:height' and `:relative-height' together.
3387
3388*** Images
3389
3390A display specification for an image has the form `(LOCATION
3391. IMAGE)', where IMAGE is an image specification. The image replaces,
3392in the display, the characters having this display specification in
3393their `display' text property. If LOCATION is `(margin left-margin)',
3394the image will be displayed in the left marginal area, if it is
3395`(margin right-margin)' it will be displayed in the right marginal
3396area, and if LOCATION is `(margin nil)' the image will be displayed in
3397the text. In the latter case you can also use the simpler form IMAGE
3398as display specification.
3399
3400*** Other display properties
3401
3402- :space-width FACTOR
3403
3404Specifies that space characters in the text having that property
3405should be displayed FACTOR times as wide as normal; FACTOR must be an
3406integer or float.
3407
3408- :height HEIGHT
3409
3410Display text having this property in a font that is smaller or larger.
3411
3412If HEIGHT is a list of the form `(+ N)', where N is an integer, that
3413means to use a font that is N steps larger. If HEIGHT is a list of
3414the form `(- N)', that means to use a font that is N steps smaller. A
3415``step'' is defined by the set of available fonts; each size for which
3416a font is available counts as a step.
3417
3418If HEIGHT is a number, that means to use a font that is HEIGHT times
3419as tall as the frame's default font.
3420
3421If HEIGHT is a symbol, it is called as a function with the current
3422height as argument. The function should return the new height to use.
3423
3424Otherwise, HEIGHT is evaluated to get the new height, with the symbol
3425`height' bound to the current specified font height.
3426
3427- :raise FACTOR
3428
3429FACTOR must be a number, specifying a multiple of the current
3430font's height. If it is positive, that means to display the characters
3431raised. If it is negative, that means to display them lower down. The
3432amount of raising or lowering is computed without taking account of the
3433`:height' subproperty.
3434
3435*** Conditional display properties
3436
3437All display specifications can be conditionalized. If a specification
3438has the form `(:when CONDITION . SPEC)', the specification SPEC
3439applies only when CONDITION yields a non-nil value when evaluated.
3440During evaluattion, point is temporarily set to the end position of
3441the text having the `display' property.
3442
3443The normal specification consisting of SPEC only is equivalent to
3444`(:when t SPEC)'.
3445
3446+++
3447** New menu separator types.
3448
3449Emacs now supports more than one menu separator type. Menu items with
3450item names consisting of dashes only (including zero dashes) are
3451treated like before. In addition, the following item names are used
3452to specify other menu separator types.
3453
3454- `--no-line' or `--space', or `--:space', or `--:noLine'
3455
3456No separator lines are drawn, but a small space is inserted where the
3457separator occurs.
3458
3459- `--single-line' or `--:singleLine'
3460
3461A single line in the menu's foreground color.
3462
3463- `--double-line' or `--:doubleLine'
3464
3465A double line in the menu's foreground color.
3466
3467- `--single-dashed-line' or `--:singleDashedLine'
3468
3469A single dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3470
3471- `--double-dashed-line' or `--:doubleDashedLine'
3472
3473A double dashed line in the menu's foreground color.
3474
3475- `--shadow-etched-in' or `--:shadowEtchedIn'
3476
3477A single line with 3D sunken appearance. This is the the form
3478displayed for item names consisting of dashes only.
3479
3480- `--shadow-etched-out' or `--:shadowEtchedOut'
3481
3482A single line with 3D raised appearance.
3483
3484- `--shadow-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedInDash'
3485
3486A single dashed line with 3D sunken appearance.
3487
3488- `--shadow-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowEtchedOutDash'
3489
3490A single dashed line with 3D raise appearance.
3491
3492- `--shadow-double-etched-in' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedIn'
3493
3494Two lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3495
3496- `--shadow-double-etched-out' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOut'
3497
3498Two lines with 3D raised appearance.
3499
3500- `--shadow-double-etched-in-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedInDash'
3501
3502Two dashed lines with 3D sunken appearance.
3503
3504- `--shadow-double-etched-out-dash' or `--:shadowDoubleEtchedOutDash'
3505
3506Two dashed lines with 3D raised appearance.
3507
3508Under LessTif/Motif, the last four separator types are displayed like
3509the corresponding single-line separators.
3510
3511+++
3512** New frame parameters for scroll bar colors.
3513
3514The new frame parameters `scroll-bar-foreground' and
3515`scroll-bar-background' can be used to change scroll bar colors.
3516Their value must be either a color name, a string, or nil to specify
3517that scroll bars should use a default color. For toolkit scroll bars,
3518default colors are toolkit specific. For non-toolkit scroll bars, the
3519default background is the background color of the frame, and the
3520default foreground is black.
3521
3522The X resource name of these parameters are `scrollBarForeground'
3523(class ScrollBarForeground) and `scrollBarBackground' (class
3524`ScrollBarBackground').
3525
3526Setting these parameters overrides toolkit specific X resource
3527settings for scroll bar colors.
3528
3529+++
3530** You can set `redisplay-dont-pause' to a non-nil value to prevent
3531display updates from being interrupted when input is pending.
3532
3533---
3534** Changing a window's width may now change its window start if it
3535starts on a continuation line. The new window start is computed based
3536on the window's new width, starting from the start of the continued
3537line as the start of the screen line with the minimum distance from
3538the original window start.
3539
3540---
3541** The variable `hscroll-step' and the functions
3542`hscroll-point-visible' and `hscroll-window-column' have been removed
3543now that proper horizontal scrolling is implemented.
3544
3545+++
3546** Windows can now be made fixed-width and/or fixed-height.
3547
3548A window is fixed-size if its buffer has a buffer-local variable
3549`window-size-fixed' whose value is not nil. A value of `height' makes
3550windows fixed-height, a value of `width' makes them fixed-width, any
3551other non-nil value makes them both fixed-width and fixed-height.
3552
3553The following code makes all windows displaying the current buffer
3554fixed-width and fixed-height.
3555
3556 (set (make-local-variable 'window-size-fixed) t)
3557
3558A call to enlarge-window on a window gives an error if that window is
3559fixed-width and it is tried to change the window's width, or if the
3560window is fixed-height, and it is tried to change its height. To
3561change the size of a fixed-size window, bind `window-size-fixed'
3562temporarily to nil, for example
3563
3564 (let ((window-size-fixed nil))
3565 (enlarge-window 10))
3566
79214ddf 3567Likewise, an attempt to split a fixed-height window vertically,
a933dad1 3568or a fixed-width window horizontally results in a error.
e411ce4b
EZ
3569
3570** The cursor-type frame parameter is now supported on MS-DOS
3571terminals. When Emacs starts, it by default changes the cursor shape
3572to a solid box, as it does on Unix. The `cursor-type' frame parameter
3573overrides this as it does on Unix, except that the bar cursor is
3574horizontal rather than vertical (since the MS-DOS display doesn't
3575support a vertical-bar cursor).
76299050 3576
3787e12e
GM
3577
3578^L
3579* Emacs 20.7 is a bug-fix release with few user-visible changes
3580
3581** It is now possible to use CCL-based coding systems for keyboard
3582input.
3583
3584** ange-ftp now handles FTP security extensions, like Kerberos.
3585
3586** Rmail has been extended to recognize more forms of digest messages.
3587
3588** Now, most coding systems set in keyboard coding system work not
3589only for character input, but also in incremental search. The
3590exceptions are such coding systems that handle 2-byte character sets
3591(e.g euc-kr, euc-jp) and that use ISO's escape sequence
3592(e.g. iso-2022-jp). They are ignored in incremental search.
3593
3594** Support for Macintosh PowerPC-based machines running GNU/Linux has
3595been added.
3596
3597^L
3598* Emacs 20.6 is a bug-fix release with one user-visible change
3599
3600** Support for ARM-based non-RISCiX machines has been added.
3601
3602^L
3603* Emacs 20.5 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
3604
3605** Not new, but not mentioned before:
3606M-w when Transient Mark mode is enabled disables the mark.
3607\f
3608* Changes in Emacs 20.4
3609
3610** Init file may be called .emacs.el.
3611
3612You can now call the Emacs init file `.emacs.el'.
3613Formerly the name had to be `.emacs'. If you use the name
3614`.emacs.el', you can byte-compile the file in the usual way.
3615
3616If both `.emacs' and `.emacs.el' exist, the latter file
3617is the one that is used.
3618
3619** shell-command, and shell-command-on-region, now return
3620the exit code of the command (unless it is asynchronous).
3621Also, you can specify a place to put the error output,
3622separate from the command's regular output.
3623Interactively, the variable shell-command-default-error-buffer
3624says where to put error output; set it to a buffer name.
3625In calls from Lisp, an optional argument ERROR-BUFFER specifies
3626the buffer name.
3627
3628When you specify a non-nil error buffer (or buffer name), any error
3629output is inserted before point in that buffer, with \f\n to separate
3630it from the previous batch of error output. The error buffer is not
3631cleared, so error output from successive commands accumulates there.
3632
3633** Setting the default value of enable-multibyte-characters to nil in
3634the .emacs file, either explicitly using setq-default, or via Custom,
3635is now essentially equivalent to using --unibyte: all buffers
3636created during startup will be made unibyte after loading .emacs.
3637
3638** C-x C-f now handles the wildcards * and ? in file names. For
3639example, typing C-x C-f c*.c RET visits all the files whose names
3640match c*.c. To visit a file whose name contains * or ?, add the
3641quoting sequence /: to the beginning of the file name.
3642
3643** The M-x commands keep-lines, flush-lines and count-matches
3644now have the same feature as occur and query-replace:
3645if the pattern contains any upper case letters, then
3646they never ignore case.
3647
3648** The end-of-line format conversion feature previously mentioned
3649under `* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows' actually
3650applies to all operating systems. Emacs recognizes from the contents
3651of a file what convention it uses to separate lines--newline, CRLF, or
3652just CR--and automatically converts the contents to the normal Emacs
3653convention (using newline to separate lines) for editing. This is a
3654part of the general feature of coding system conversion.
3655
3656If you subsequently save the buffer, Emacs converts the text back to
3657the same format that was used in the file before.
3658
3659You can turn off end-of-line conversion by setting the variable
3660`inhibit-eol-conversion' to non-nil, e.g. with Custom in the MULE group.
3661
3662** The character set property `prefered-coding-system' has been
3663renamed to `preferred-coding-system', for the sake of correct spelling.
3664This is a fairly internal feature, so few programs should be affected.
3665
3666** Mode-line display of end-of-line format is changed.
3667The indication of the end-of-line format of the file visited by a
3668buffer is now more explicit when that format is not the usual one for
3669your operating system. For example, the DOS-style end-of-line format
3670is displayed as "(DOS)" on Unix and GNU/Linux systems. The usual
3671end-of-line format is still displayed as a single character (colon for
3672Unix, backslash for DOS and Windows, and forward slash for the Mac).
3673
3674The values of the variables eol-mnemonic-unix, eol-mnemonic-dos,
3675eol-mnemonic-mac, and eol-mnemonic-undecided, which are strings,
3676control what is displayed in the mode line for each end-of-line
3677format. You can now customize these variables.
3678
3679** In the previous version of Emacs, tar-mode didn't work well if a
3680filename contained non-ASCII characters. Now this is fixed. Such a
3681filename is decoded by file-name-coding-system if the default value of
3682enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil.
3683
3684** The command temp-buffer-resize-mode toggles a minor mode
3685in which temporary buffers (such as help buffers) are given
3686windows just big enough to hold the whole contents.
3687
3688** If you use completion.el, you must now run the function
3689dynamic-completion-mode to enable it. Just loading the file
3690doesn't have any effect.
3691
3692** In Flyspell mode, the default is now to make just one Ispell process,
3693not one per buffer.
3694
3695** If you use iswitchb but do not call (iswitchb-default-keybindings) to
3696use the default keybindings, you will need to add the following line:
3697 (add-hook 'minibuffer-setup-hook 'iswitchb-minibuffer-setup)
3698
3699** Auto-show mode is no longer enabled just by loading auto-show.el.
3700To control it, set `auto-show-mode' via Custom or use the
3701`auto-show-mode' command.
3702
3703** Handling of X fonts' ascent/descent parameters has been changed to
3704avoid redisplay problems. As a consequence, compared with previous
3705versions the line spacing and frame size now differ with some font
3706choices, typically increasing by a pixel per line. This change
3707occurred in version 20.3 but was not documented then.
3708
3709** If you select the bar cursor style, it uses the frame's
3710cursor-color, rather than the cursor foreground pixel.
3711
3712** In multibyte mode, Rmail decodes incoming MIME messages using the
3713character set specified in the message. If you want to disable this
3714feature, set the variable rmail-decode-mime-charset to nil.
3715
3716** Not new, but not mentioned previously in NEWS: when you use #! at
3717the beginning of a file to make it executable and specify an
3718interpreter program, Emacs looks on the second line for the -*- mode
3719and variable specification, as well as on the first line.
3720
3721** Support for IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters.
3722
3723The new command M-x codepage-setup creates a special coding system
3724that can be used to convert text between a specific IBM codepage and
3725one of the character sets built into Emacs which matches that
3726codepage. For example, codepage 850 corresponds to Latin-1 character
3727set, codepage 855 corresponds to Cyrillic-ISO character set, etc.
3728
3729Windows codepages 1250, 1251 and some others, where Windows deviates
3730from the corresponding ISO character set, are also supported.
3731
3732IBM box-drawing characters and other glyphs which don't have
3733equivalents in the corresponding ISO character set, are converted to
3734a character defined by dos-unsupported-char-glyph on MS-DOS, and to
3735`?' on other systems.
3736
3737IBM codepages are widely used on MS-DOS and MS-Windows, so this
3738feature is most useful on those platforms, but it can also be used on
3739Unix.
3740
3741Emacs compiled for MS-DOS automatically loads the support for the
3742current codepage when it starts.
3743
3744** Mail changes
3745
3746*** When mail is sent using compose-mail (C-x m), and if
3747`mail-send-nonascii' is set to the new default value `mime',
3748appropriate MIME headers are added. The headers are added only if
3749non-ASCII characters are present in the body of the mail, and no other
3750MIME headers are already present. For example, the following three
3751headers are added if the coding system used in the *mail* buffer is
3752latin-1:
3753
3754 MIME-version: 1.0
3755 Content-type: text/plain; charset=iso-8859-1
3756 Content-Transfer-Encoding: 8bit
3757
3758*** The new variable default-sendmail-coding-system specifies the
3759default way to encode outgoing mail. This has higher priority than
3760default-buffer-file-coding-system but has lower priority than
3761sendmail-coding-system and the local value of
3762buffer-file-coding-system.
3763
3764You should not set this variable manually. Instead, set
3765sendmail-coding-system to specify a fixed encoding for all outgoing
3766mail.
3767
3768*** When you try to send a message that contains non-ASCII characters,
3769if the coding system specified by those variables doesn't handle them,
3770Emacs will ask you to select a suitable coding system while showing a
3771list of possible coding systems.
3772
3773** CC Mode changes
3774
3775*** c-default-style can now take an association list that maps major
3776modes to style names. When this variable is an alist, Java mode no
3777longer hardcodes a setting to "java" style. See the variable's
3778docstring for details.
3779
3780*** It's now possible to put a list as the offset on a syntactic
3781symbol. The list is evaluated recursively until a non-nil offset is
3782found. This is useful to combine several lineup functions to act in a
3783prioritized order on a single line. However, none of the supplied
3784lineup functions use this feature currently.
3785
3786*** New syntactic symbol catch-clause, which is used on the "catch" and
3787"finally" lines in try-catch constructs in C++ and Java.
3788
3789*** New cleanup brace-catch-brace on c-cleanup-list, which does for
3790"catch" lines what brace-elseif-brace does for "else if" lines.
3791
3792*** The braces of Java anonymous inner classes are treated separately
3793from the braces of other classes in auto-newline mode. Two new
3794symbols inexpr-class-open and inexpr-class-close may be used on
3795c-hanging-braces-alist to control the automatic newlines used for
3796anonymous classes.
3797
3798*** Support for the Pike language added, along with new Pike specific
3799syntactic symbols: inlambda, lambda-intro-cont
3800
3801*** Support for Java anonymous classes via new syntactic symbol
3802inexpr-class. New syntactic symbol inexpr-statement for Pike
3803support and gcc-style statements inside expressions. New lineup
3804function c-lineup-inexpr-block.
3805
3806*** New syntactic symbol brace-entry-open which is used in brace lists
3807(i.e. static initializers) when a list entry starts with an open
3808brace. These used to be recognized as brace-list-entry's.
3809c-electric-brace also recognizes brace-entry-open braces
3810(brace-list-entry's can no longer be electrified).
3811
3812*** New command c-indent-line-or-region, not bound by default.
3813
3814*** `#' is only electric when typed in the indentation of a line.
3815
3816*** Parentheses are now electric (via the new command c-electric-paren)
3817for auto-reindenting lines when parens are typed.
3818
3819*** In "gnu" style, inline-open offset is now set to zero.
3820
3821*** Uniform handling of the inclass syntactic symbol. The indentation
3822associated with it is now always relative to the class opening brace.
3823This means that the indentation behavior has changed in some
3824circumstances, but only if you've put anything besides 0 on the
3825class-open syntactic symbol (none of the default styles do that).
3826
3827** Gnus changes.
3828
3829*** New functionality for using Gnus as an offline newsreader has been
3830added. A plethora of new commands and modes have been added. See the
3831Gnus manual for the full story.
3832
3833*** The nndraft backend has returned, but works differently than
3834before. All Message buffers are now also articles in the nndraft
3835group, which is created automatically.
3836
3837*** `gnus-alter-header-function' can now be used to alter header
3838values.
3839
3840*** `gnus-summary-goto-article' now accept Message-ID's.
3841
3842*** A new Message command for deleting text in the body of a message
3843outside the region: `C-c C-v'.
3844
3845*** You can now post to component group in nnvirtual groups with
3846`C-u C-c C-c'.
3847
3848*** `nntp-rlogin-program' -- new variable to ease customization.
3849
3850*** `C-u C-c C-c' in `gnus-article-edit-mode' will now inhibit
3851re-highlighting of the article buffer.
3852
3853*** New element in `gnus-boring-article-headers' -- `long-to'.
3854
3855*** `M-i' symbolic prefix command. See the section "Symbolic
3856Prefixes" in the Gnus manual for details.
3857
3858*** `L' and `I' in the summary buffer now take the symbolic prefix
3859`a' to add the score rule to the "all.SCORE" file.
3860
3861*** `gnus-simplify-subject-functions' variable to allow greater
3862control over simplification.
3863
3864*** `A T' -- new command for fetching the current thread.
3865
3866*** `/ T' -- new command for including the current thread in the
3867limit.
3868
3869*** `M-RET' is a new Message command for breaking cited text.
3870
3871*** \\1-expressions are now valid in `nnmail-split-methods'.
3872
3873*** The `custom-face-lookup' function has been removed.
3874If you used this function in your initialization files, you must
3875rewrite them to use `face-spec-set' instead.
3876
3877*** Cancelling now uses the current select method. Symbolic prefix
3878`a' forces normal posting method.
3879
3880*** New command to translate M******** sm*rtq**t*s into proper text
3881-- `W d'.
3882
3883*** For easier debugging of nntp, you can set `nntp-record-commands'
3884to a non-nil value.
3885
3886*** nntp now uses ~/.authinfo, a .netrc-like file, for controlling
3887where and how to send AUTHINFO to NNTP servers.
3888
3889*** A command for editing group parameters from the summary buffer
3890has been added.
3891
3892*** A history of where mails have been split is available.
3893
3894*** A new article date command has been added -- `article-date-iso8601'.
3895
3896*** Subjects can be simplified when threading by setting
3897`gnus-score-thread-simplify'.
3898
3899*** A new function for citing in Message has been added --
3900`message-cite-original-without-signature'.
3901
3902*** `article-strip-all-blank-lines' -- new article command.
3903
3904*** A new Message command to kill to the end of the article has
3905been added.
3906
3907*** A minimum adaptive score can be specified by using the
3908`gnus-adaptive-word-minimum' variable.
3909
3910*** The "lapsed date" article header can be kept continually
3911updated by the `gnus-start-date-timer' command.
3912
3913*** Web listserv archives can be read with the nnlistserv backend.
3914
3915*** Old dejanews archives can now be read by nnweb.
3916
3917*** `gnus-posting-styles' has been re-activated.
3918
3919** Changes to TeX and LaTeX mode
3920
3921*** The new variable `tex-start-options-string' can be used to give
3922options for the TeX run. The default value causes TeX to run in
3923nonstopmode. For an interactive TeX run set it to nil or "".
3924
3925*** The command `tex-feed-input' sends input to the Tex Shell. In a
3926TeX buffer it is bound to the keys C-RET, C-c RET, and C-c C-m (some
3927of these keys may not work on all systems). For instance, if you run
3928TeX interactively and if the TeX run stops because of an error, you
3929can continue it without leaving the TeX buffer by typing C-RET.
3930
3931*** The Tex Shell Buffer is now in `compilation-shell-minor-mode'.
3932All error-parsing commands of the Compilation major mode are available
3933but bound to keys that don't collide with the shell. Thus you can use
3934the Tex Shell for command line executions like a usual shell.
3935
3936*** The commands `tex-validate-region' and `tex-validate-buffer' check
3937the matching of braces and $'s. The errors are listed in a *Occur*
3938buffer and you can use C-c C-c or mouse-2 to go to a particular
3939mismatch.
3940
3941** Changes to RefTeX mode
3942
3943*** The table of contents buffer can now also display labels and
3944file boundaries in addition to sections. Use `l', `i', and `c' keys.
3945
3946*** Labels derived from context (the section heading) are now
3947lowercase by default. To make the label legal in LaTeX, latin-1
3948characters will lose their accent. All Mule characters will be
3949removed from the label.
3950
3951*** The automatic display of cross reference information can also use
3952a window instead of the echo area. See variable `reftex-auto-view-crossref'.
3953
3954*** kpsewhich can be used by RefTeX to find TeX and BibTeX files. See the
3955customization group `reftex-finding-files'.
3956
3957*** The option `reftex-bibfile-ignore-list' has been renamed to
3958`reftex-bibfile-ignore-regexps' and indeed can be fed with regular
3959expressions.
3960
3961*** Multiple Selection buffers are now hidden buffers.
3962
3963** New/deleted modes and packages
3964
3965*** The package snmp-mode.el provides major modes for editing SNMP and
3966SNMPv2 MIBs. It has entries on `auto-mode-alist'.
3967
3968*** The package sql.el provides a major mode, M-x sql-mode, for
3969editing SQL files, and M-x sql-interactive-mode for interacting with
3970SQL interpreters. It has an entry on `auto-mode-alist'.
3971
3972*** M-x highlight-changes-mode provides a minor mode displaying buffer
3973changes with a special face.
3974
3975*** ispell4.el has been deleted. It got in the way of ispell.el and
3976this was hard to fix reliably. It has long been obsolete -- use
3977Ispell 3.1 and ispell.el.
3978\f
3979* MS-DOS changes in Emacs 20.4
3980
3981** Emacs compiled for MS-DOS now supports MULE features better.
3982This includes support for display of all ISO 8859-N character sets,
3983conversion to and from IBM codepage encoding of non-ASCII characters,
3984and automatic setup of the MULE environment at startup. For details,
3985check out the section `MS-DOS and MULE' in the manual.
3986
3987The MS-DOS installation procedure automatically configures and builds
3988Emacs with input method support if it finds an unpacked Leim
3989distribution when the config.bat script is run.
3990
3991** Formerly, the value of lpr-command did not affect printing on
3992MS-DOS unless print-region-function was set to nil, but now it
3993controls whether an external program is invoked or output is written
3994directly to a printer port. Similarly, in the previous version of
3995Emacs, the value of ps-lpr-command did not affect PostScript printing
3996on MS-DOS unless ps-printer-name was set to something other than a
3997string (eg. t or `pipe'), but now it controls whether an external
3998program is used. (These changes were made so that configuration of
3999printing variables would be almost identical across all platforms.)
4000
4001** In the previous version of Emacs, PostScript and non-PostScript
4002output was piped to external programs, but because most print programs
4003available for MS-DOS and MS-Windows cannot read data from their standard
4004input, on those systems the data to be output is now written to a
4005temporary file whose name is passed as the last argument to the external
4006program.
4007
4008An exception is made for `print', a standard program on Windows NT,
4009and `nprint', a standard program on Novell Netware. For both of these
4010programs, the command line is constructed in the appropriate syntax
4011automatically, using only the value of printer-name or ps-printer-name
4012as appropriate--the value of the relevant `-switches' variable is
4013ignored, as both programs have no useful switches.
4014
4015** The value of the variable dos-printer (cf. dos-ps-printer), if it has
4016a value, overrides the value of printer-name (cf. ps-printer-name), on
4017MS-DOS and MS-Windows only. This has been true since version 20.3, but
4018was not documented clearly before.
4019
4020** All the Emacs games now work on MS-DOS terminals.
4021This includes Tetris and Snake.
4022\f
4023* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.4
4024
4025** New functions line-beginning-position and line-end-position
4026return the position of the beginning or end of the current line.
4027They both accept an optional argument, which has the same
4028meaning as the argument to beginning-of-line or end-of-line.
4029
4030** find-file and allied functions now have an optional argument
4031WILDCARD. If this is non-nil, they do wildcard processing,
4032and visit all files that match the wildcard pattern.
4033
4034** Changes in the file-attributes function.
4035
4036*** The file size returned by file-attributes may be an integer or a float.
4037It is an integer if the size fits in a Lisp integer, float otherwise.
4038
4039*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
4040the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a cons cell containing two
4041integers.
4042
4043** The new function directory-files-and-attributes returns a list of
4044files in a directory and their attributes. It accepts the same
4045arguments as directory-files and has similar semantics, except that
4046file names and attributes are returned.
4047
4048** The new function file-attributes-lessp is a helper function for
4049sorting the list generated by directory-files-and-attributes. It
4050accepts two arguments, each a list of a file name and its atttributes.
4051It compares the file names of each according to string-lessp and
4052returns the result.
4053
4054** The new function file-expand-wildcards expands a wildcard-pattern
4055to produce a list of existing files that match the pattern.
4056
4057** New functions for base64 conversion:
4058
4059The function base64-encode-region converts a part of the buffer
4060into the base64 code used in MIME. base64-decode-region
4061performs the opposite conversion. Line-breaking is supported
4062optionally.
4063
4064Functions base64-encode-string and base64-decode-string do a similar
4065job on the text in a string. They return the value as a new string.
4066
4067**
4068The new function process-running-child-p
4069will tell you if a subprocess has given control of its
4070terminal to its own child process.
4071
4072** interrupt-process and such functions have a new feature:
4073when the second argument is `lambda', they send a signal
4074to the running child of the subshell, if any, but if the shell
4075itself owns its terminal, no signal is sent.
4076
4077** There are new widget types `plist' and `alist' which can
4078be used for customizing variables whose values are plists or alists.
4079
4080** easymenu.el Now understands `:key-sequence' and `:style button'.
4081:included is an alias for :visible.
4082
4083easy-menu-add-item now understands the values returned by
4084easy-menu-remove-item and easy-menu-item-present-p. This can be used
4085to move or copy menu entries.
4086
4087** Multibyte editing changes
4088
4089*** The definitions of sref and char-bytes are changed. Now, sref is
4090an alias of aref and char-bytes always returns 1. This change is to
4091make some Emacs Lisp code which works on 20.2 and earlier also
4092work on the latest Emacs. Such code uses a combination of sref and
4093char-bytes in a loop typically as below:
4094 (setq char (sref str idx)
4095 idx (+ idx (char-bytes idx)))
4096The byte-compiler now warns that this is obsolete.
4097
4098If you want to know how many bytes a specific multibyte character
4099(say, CH) occupies in a multibyte buffer, use this code:
4100 (charset-bytes (char-charset ch))
4101
4102*** In multibyte mode, when you narrow a buffer to some region, and the
4103region is preceded or followed by non-ASCII codes, inserting or
4104deleting at the head or the end of the region may signal this error:
4105
4106 Byte combining across boundary of accessible buffer text inhibitted
4107
4108This is to avoid some bytes being combined together into a character
4109across the boundary.
4110
4111*** The functions find-charset-region and find-charset-string include
4112`unknown' in the returned list in the following cases:
4113 o The current buffer or the target string is unibyte and
4114 contains 8-bit characters.
4115 o The current buffer or the target string is multibyte and
4116 contains invalid characters.
4117
4118*** The functions decode-coding-region and encode-coding-region remove
4119text properties of the target region. Ideally, they should correctly
4120preserve text properties, but for the moment, it's hard. Removing
4121text properties is better than preserving them in a less-than-correct
4122way.
4123
4124*** prefer-coding-system sets EOL conversion of default coding systems.
4125If the argument to prefer-coding-system specifies a certain type of
4126end of line conversion, the default coding systems set by
4127prefer-coding-system will specify that conversion type for end of line.
4128
4129*** The new function thai-compose-string can be used to properly
4130compose Thai characters in a string.
4131
4132** The primitive `define-prefix-command' now takes an optional third
4133argument NAME, which should be a string. It supplies the menu name
4134for the created keymap. Keymaps created in order to be displayed as
4135menus should always use the third argument.
4136
4137** The meanings of optional second arguments for read-char,
4138read-event, and read-char-exclusive are flipped. Now the second
4139arguments are INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. These functions use the current
4140input method (if any) if and only if INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD is non-nil.
4141
4142** The new function clear-this-command-keys empties out the contents
4143of the vector that (this-command-keys) returns. This is useful in
4144programs that read passwords, to prevent the passwords from echoing
4145inadvertently as part of the next command in certain cases.
4146
4147** The new macro `with-temp-message' displays a temporary message in
4148the echo area, while executing some Lisp code. Like `progn', it
4149returns the value of the last form, but it also restores the previous
4150echo area contents.
4151
4152 (with-temp-message MESSAGE &rest BODY)
4153
4154** The function `require' now takes an optional third argument
4155NOERROR. If it is non-nil, then there is no error if the
4156requested feature cannot be loaded.
4157
4158** In the function modify-face, an argument of (nil) for the
4159foreground color, background color or stipple pattern
4160means to clear out that attribute.
4161
4162** The `outer-window-id' frame property of an X frame
4163gives the window number of the outermost X window for the frame.
4164
4165** Temporary buffers made with with-output-to-temp-buffer are now
4166read-only by default, and normally use the major mode Help mode
4167unless you put them in some other non-Fundamental mode before the
4168end of with-output-to-temp-buffer.
4169
4170** The new functions gap-position and gap-size return information on
4171the gap of the current buffer.
4172
4173** The new functions position-bytes and byte-to-position provide a way
4174to convert between character positions and byte positions in the
4175current buffer.
4176
4177** vc.el defines two new macros, `edit-vc-file' and `with-vc-file', to
4178facilitate working with version-controlled files from Lisp programs.
4179These macros check out a given file automatically if needed, and check
4180it back in after any modifications have been made.
4181\f
4182* Installation Changes in Emacs 20.3
4183
4184** The default value of load-path now includes most subdirectories of
4185the site-specific directories /usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp and
4186/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp, in addition to those
4187directories themselves. Both immediate subdirectories and
4188subdirectories multiple levels down are added to load-path.
4189
4190Not all subdirectories are included, though. Subdirectories whose
4191names do not start with a letter or digit are excluded.
4192Subdirectories named RCS or CVS are excluded. Also, a subdirectory
4193which contains a file named `.nosearch' is excluded. You can use
4194these methods to prevent certain subdirectories from being searched.
4195
4196Emacs finds these subdirectories and adds them to load-path when it
4197starts up. While it would be cleaner to find the subdirectories each
4198time Emacs loads a file, that would be much slower.
4199
4200This feature is an incompatible change. If you have stored some Emacs
4201Lisp files in a subdirectory of the site-lisp directory specifically
4202to prevent them from being used, you will need to rename the
4203subdirectory to start with a non-alphanumeric character, or create a
4204`.nosearch' file in it, in order to continue to achieve the desired
4205results.
4206
4207** Emacs no longer includes an old version of the C preprocessor from
4208GCC. This was formerly used to help compile Emacs with C compilers
4209that had limits on the significant length of an identifier, but in
4210fact we stopped supporting such compilers some time ago.
4211\f
4212* Changes in Emacs 20.3
4213
4214** The new command C-x z (repeat) repeats the previous command
4215including its argument. If you repeat the z afterward,
4216it repeats the command additional times; thus, you can
4217perform many repetitions with one keystroke per repetition.
4218
4219** Emacs now supports "selective undo" which undoes only within a
4220specified region. To do this, set point and mark around the desired
4221region and type C-u C-x u (or C-u C-_). You can then continue undoing
4222further, within the same region, by repeating the ordinary undo
4223command C-x u or C-_. This will keep undoing changes that were made
4224within the region you originally specified, until either all of them
4225are undone, or it encounters a change which crosses the edge of that
4226region.
4227
4228In Transient Mark mode, undoing when a region is active requests
4229selective undo.
4230
4231** If you specify --unibyte when starting Emacs, then all buffers are
4232unibyte, except when a Lisp program specifically creates a multibyte
4233buffer. Setting the environment variable EMACS_UNIBYTE has the same
4234effect. The --no-unibyte option overrides EMACS_UNIBYTE and directs
4235Emacs to run normally in multibyte mode.
4236
4237The option --unibyte does not affect the reading of Emacs Lisp files,
4238though. If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode, use
4239-*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line. That will force Emacs to
4240load that file in unibyte mode, regardless of how Emacs was started.
4241
4242** toggle-enable-multibyte-characters no longer has a key binding and
4243no longer appears in the menu bar. We've realized that changing the
4244enable-multibyte-characters variable in an existing buffer is
4245something that most users not do.
4246
4247** You can specify a coding system to use for the next cut or paste
4248operations through the window system with the command C-x RET X.
4249The coding system can make a difference for communication with other
4250applications.
4251
4252C-x RET x specifies a coding system for all subsequent cutting and
4253pasting operations.
4254
4255** You can specify the printer to use for commands that do printing by
4256setting the variable `printer-name'. Just what a printer name looks
4257like depends on your operating system. You can specify a different
4258printer for the Postscript printing commands by setting
4259`ps-printer-name'.
4260
4261** Emacs now supports on-the-fly spell checking by the means of a
4262minor mode. It is called M-x flyspell-mode. You don't have to remember
4263any other special commands to use it, and you will hardly notice it
4264except when you make a spelling error. Flyspell works by highlighting
4265incorrect words as soon as they are completed or as soon as the cursor
4266hits a new word.
4267
4268Flyspell mode works with whichever dictionary you have selected for
4269Ispell in Emacs. In TeX mode, it understands TeX syntax so as not
4270to be confused by TeX commands.
4271
4272You can correct a misspelled word by editing it into something
4273correct. You can also correct it, or accept it as correct, by
4274clicking on the word with Mouse-2; that gives you a pop-up menu
4275of various alternative replacements and actions.
4276
4277Flyspell mode also proposes "automatic" corrections. M-TAB replaces
4278the current misspelled word with a possible correction. If several
4279corrections are made possible, M-TAB cycles through them in
4280alphabetical order, or in order of decreasing likelihood if
4281flyspell-sort-corrections is nil.
4282
4283Flyspell mode also flags an error when a word is repeated, if
4284flyspell-mark-duplications-flag is non-nil.
4285
4286** Changes in input method usage.
4287
4288Now you can use arrow keys (right, left, down, up) for selecting among
4289the alternatives just the same way as you do by C-f, C-b, C-n, and C-p
4290respectively.
4291
4292You can use the ENTER key to accept the current conversion.
4293
4294If you type TAB to display a list of alternatives, you can select one
4295of the alternatives with Mouse-2.
4296
4297The meaning of the variable `input-method-verbose-flag' is changed so
4298that you can set it to t, nil, `default', or `complex-only'.
4299
4300 If the value is nil, extra guidance is never given.
4301
4302 If the value is t, extra guidance is always given.
4303
4304 If the value is `complex-only', extra guidance is always given only
4305 when you are using complex input methods such as chinese-py.
4306
4307 If the value is `default' (this is the default), extra guidance is
4308 given in the following case:
4309 o When you are using a complex input method.
4310 o When you are using a simple input method but not in the minibuffer.
4311
4312If you are using Emacs through a very slow line, setting
4313input-method-verbose-flag to nil or to complex-only is a good choice,
4314and if you are using an input method you are not familiar with,
4315setting it to t is helpful.
4316
4317The old command select-input-method is now called set-input-method.
4318
4319In the language environment "Korean", you can use the following
4320keys:
4321 Shift-SPC toggle-korean-input-method
4322 C-F9 quail-hangul-switch-symbol-ksc
4323 F9 quail-hangul-switch-hanja
4324These key bindings are canceled when you switch to another language
4325environment.
4326
4327** The minibuffer history of file names now records the specified file
4328names, not the entire minibuffer input. For example, if the
4329minibuffer starts out with /usr/foo/, you might type in /etc/passwd to
4330get
4331
4332 /usr/foo//etc/passwd
4333
4334which stands for the file /etc/passwd.
4335
4336Formerly, this used to put /usr/foo//etc/passwd in the history list.
4337Now this puts just /etc/passwd in the history list.
4338
4339** If you are root, Emacs sets backup-by-copying-when-mismatch to t
4340at startup, so that saving a file will be sure to preserve
4341its owner and group.
4342
4343** find-func.el can now also find the place of definition of Emacs
4344Lisp variables in user-loaded libraries.
4345
4346** C-x r t (string-rectangle) now deletes the existing rectangle
4347contents before inserting the specified string on each line.
4348
4349** There is a new command delete-whitespace-rectangle
4350which deletes whitespace starting from a particular column
4351in all the lines on a rectangle. The column is specified
4352by the left edge of the rectangle.
4353
4354** You can now store a number into a register with C-u NUMBER C-x r n REG,
4355increment it by INC with C-u INC C-x r + REG (to increment by one, omit
4356C-u INC), and insert it in the buffer with C-x r g REG. This is useful
4357for writing keyboard macros.
4358
4359** The new command M-x speedbar displays a frame in which directories,
4360files, and tags can be displayed, manipulated, and jumped to. The
4361frame defaults to 20 characters in width, and is the same height as
4362the frame that it was started from. Some major modes define
4363additional commands for the speedbar, including Rmail, GUD/GDB, and
4364info.
4365
4366** query-replace-regexp is now bound to C-M-%.
4367
4368** In Transient Mark mode, when the region is active, M-x
4369query-replace and the other replace commands now operate on the region
4370contents only.
4371
4372** M-x write-region, when used interactively, now asks for
4373confirmation before overwriting an existing file. When you call
4374the function from a Lisp program, a new optional argument CONFIRM
4375says whether to ask for confirmation in this case.
4376
4377** If you use find-file-literally and the file is already visited
4378non-literally, the command asks you whether to revisit the file
4379literally. If you say no, it signals an error.
4380
4381** Major modes defined with the "derived mode" feature
4382now use the proper name for the mode hook: WHATEVER-mode-hook.
4383Formerly they used the name WHATEVER-mode-hooks, but that is
4384inconsistent with Emacs conventions.
4385
4386** shell-command-on-region (and shell-command) reports success or
4387failure if the command produces no output.
4388
4389** Set focus-follows-mouse to nil if your window system or window
4390manager does not transfer focus to another window when you just move
4391the mouse.
4392
4393** mouse-menu-buffer-maxlen has been renamed to
4394mouse-buffer-menu-maxlen to be consistent with the other related
4395function and variable names.
4396
4397** The new variable auto-coding-alist specifies coding systems for
4398reading specific files. This has higher priority than
4399file-coding-system-alist.
4400
4401** If you set the variable unibyte-display-via-language-environment to
4402t, then Emacs displays non-ASCII characters are displayed by
4403converting them to the equivalent multibyte characters according to
4404the current language environment. As a result, they are displayed
4405according to the current fontset.
4406
4407** C-q's handling of codes in the range 0200 through 0377 is changed.
4408
4409The codes in the range 0200 through 0237 are inserted as one byte of
4410that code regardless of the values of nonascii-translation-table and
4411nonascii-insert-offset.
4412
4413For the codes in the range 0240 through 0377, if
4414enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil and nonascii-translation-table
4415nor nonascii-insert-offset can't convert them to valid multibyte
4416characters, they are converted to Latin-1 characters.
4417
4418** If you try to find a file that is not read-accessible, you now get
4419an error, rather than an empty buffer and a warning.
4420
4421** In the minibuffer history commands M-r and M-s, an upper case
4422letter in the regular expression forces case-sensitive search.
4423
4424** In the *Help* buffer, cross-references to commands and variables
4425are inferred and hyperlinked. Use C-h m in Help mode for the relevant
4426command keys.
4427
4428** M-x apropos-command, with a prefix argument, no longer looks for
4429user option variables--instead it looks for noninteractive functions.
4430
4431Meanwhile, the command apropos-variable normally searches for
4432user option variables; with a prefix argument, it looks at
4433all variables that have documentation.
4434
4435** When you type a long line in the minibuffer, and the minibuffer
4436shows just one line, automatically scrolling works in a special way
4437that shows you overlap with the previous line of text. The variable
4438minibuffer-scroll-overlap controls how many characters of overlap
4439it should show; the default is 20.
4440
4441Meanwhile, Resize Minibuffer mode is still available; in that mode,
4442the minibuffer grows taller (up to a point) as needed to show the whole
4443of your input.
4444
4445** The new command M-x customize-changed-options lets you customize
4446all the options whose meanings or default values have changed in
4447recent Emacs versions. You specify a previous Emacs version number as
4448argument, and the command creates a customization buffer showing all
4449the customizable options which were changed since that version.
4450Newly added options are included as well.
4451
4452If you don't specify a particular version number argument,
4453then the customization buffer shows all the customizable options
4454for which Emacs versions of changes are recorded.
4455
4456This function is also bound to the Changed Options entry in the
4457Customize menu.
4458
4459** When you run M-x grep with a prefix argument, it figures out
4460the tag around point and puts that into the default grep command.
4461
4462** The new command M-* (pop-tag-mark) pops back through a history of
4463buffer positions from which M-. or other tag-finding commands were
4464invoked.
4465
4466** The new variable comment-padding specifies the number of spaces
4467that `comment-region' will insert before the actual text of the comment.
4468The default is 1.
4469
4470** In Fortran mode the characters `.', `_' and `$' now have symbol
4471syntax, not word syntax. Fortran mode now supports `imenu' and has
4472new commands fortran-join-line (M-^) and fortran-narrow-to-subprogram
4473(C-x n d). M-q can be used to fill a statement or comment block
4474sensibly.
4475
4476** GUD now supports jdb, the Java debugger, and pdb, the Python debugger.
4477
4478** If you set the variable add-log-keep-changes-together to a non-nil
4479value, the command `C-x 4 a' will automatically notice when you make
4480two entries in one day for one file, and combine them.
4481
4482** You can use the command M-x diary-mail-entries to mail yourself a
4483reminder about upcoming diary entries. See the documentation string
4484for a sample shell script for calling this function automatically
4485every night.
4486
4487** Desktop changes
4488
4489*** All you need to do to enable use of the Desktop package, is to set
4490the variable desktop-enable to t with Custom.
4491
4492*** Minor modes are now restored. Which minor modes are restored
4493and how modes are restored is controlled by `desktop-minor-mode-table'.
4494
4495** There is no need to do anything special, now, to enable Gnus to
4496read and post multi-lingual articles.
4497
4498** Outline mode has now support for showing hidden outlines when
4499doing an isearch. In order for this to happen search-invisible should
4500be set to open (the default). If an isearch match is inside a hidden
4501outline the outline is made visible. If you continue pressing C-s and
4502the match moves outside the formerly invisible outline, the outline is
4503made invisible again.
4504
4505** Mail reading and sending changes
4506
4507*** The Rmail e command now switches to displaying the whole header of
4508the message before it lets you edit the message. This is so that any
4509changes you make in the header will not be lost if you subsequently
4510toggle.
4511
4512*** The w command in Rmail, which writes the message body into a file,
4513now works in the summary buffer as well. (The command to delete the
4514summary buffer is now Q.) The default file name for the w command, if
4515the message has no subject, is stored in the variable
4516rmail-default-body-file.
4517
4518*** Most of the commands and modes that operate on mail and netnews no
4519longer depend on the value of mail-header-separator. Instead, they
4520handle whatever separator the buffer happens to use.
4521
4522*** If you set mail-signature to a value which is not t, nil, or a string,
4523it should be an expression. When you send a message, this expression
4524is evaluated to insert the signature.
4525
4526*** The new Lisp library feedmail.el (version 8) enhances processing of
4527outbound email messages. It works in coordination with other email
4528handling packages (e.g., rmail, VM, gnus) and is responsible for
4529putting final touches on messages and actually submitting them for
4530transmission. Users of the emacs program "fakemail" might be
4531especially interested in trying feedmail.
4532
4533feedmail is not enabled by default. See comments at the top of
4534feedmail.el for set-up instructions. Among the bigger features
4535provided by feedmail are:
4536
4537**** you can park outgoing messages into a disk-based queue and
4538stimulate sending some or all of them later (handy for laptop users);
4539there is also a queue for draft messages
4540
4541**** you can get one last look at the prepped outbound message and
4542be prompted for confirmation
4543
4544**** does smart filling of address headers
4545
4546**** can generate a MESSAGE-ID: line and a DATE: line; the date can be
4547the time the message was written or the time it is being sent; this
4548can make FCC copies more closely resemble copies that recipients get
4549
4550**** you can specify an arbitrary function for actually transmitting
4551the message; included in feedmail are interfaces for /bin/[r]mail,
4552/usr/lib/sendmail, and elisp smtpmail; it's easy to write a new
4553function for something else (10-20 lines of elisp)
4554
4555** Dired changes
4556
4557*** The Dired function dired-do-toggle, which toggles marked and unmarked
4558files, is now bound to "t" instead of "T".
4559
4560*** dired-at-point has been added to ffap.el. It allows one to easily
4561run Dired on the directory name at point.
4562
4563*** Dired has a new command: %g. It searches the contents of
4564files in the directory and marks each file that contains a match
4565for a specified regexp.
4566
4567** VC Changes
4568
4569*** New option vc-ignore-vc-files lets you turn off version control
4570conveniently.
4571
4572*** VC Dired has been completely rewritten. It is now much
4573faster, especially for CVS, and works very similar to ordinary
4574Dired.
4575
4576VC Dired is invoked by typing C-x v d and entering the name of the
4577directory to display. By default, VC Dired gives you a recursive
4578listing of all files at or below the given directory which are
4579currently locked (for CVS, all files not up-to-date are shown).
4580
4581You can change the listing format by setting vc-dired-recurse to nil,
4582then it shows only the given directory, and you may also set
4583vc-dired-terse-display to nil, then it shows all files under version
4584control plus the names of any subdirectories, so that you can type `i'
4585on such lines to insert them manually, as in ordinary Dired.
4586
4587All Dired commands operate normally in VC Dired, except for `v', which
4588is redefined as the version control prefix. That means you may type
4589`v l', `v =' etc. to invoke `vc-print-log', `vc-diff' and the like on
4590the file named in the current Dired buffer line. `v v' invokes
4591`vc-next-action' on this file, or on all files currently marked.
4592
4593The new command `v t' (vc-dired-toggle-terse-mode) allows you to
4594toggle between terse display (only locked files) and full display (all
4595VC files plus subdirectories). There is also a special command,
4596`* l', to mark all files currently locked.
4597
4598Giving a prefix argument to C-x v d now does the same thing as in
4599ordinary Dired: it allows you to supply additional options for the ls
4600command in the minibuffer, to fine-tune VC Dired's output.
4601
4602*** Under CVS, if you merge changes from the repository into a working
4603file, and CVS detects conflicts, VC now offers to start an ediff
4604session to resolve them.
4605
4606Alternatively, you can use the new command `vc-resolve-conflicts' to
4607resolve conflicts in a file at any time. It works in any buffer that
4608contains conflict markers as generated by rcsmerge (which is what CVS
4609uses as well).
4610
4611*** You can now transfer changes between branches, using the new
4612command vc-merge (C-x v m). It is implemented for RCS and CVS. When
4613you invoke it in a buffer under version-control, you can specify
4614either an entire branch or a pair of versions, and the changes on that
4615branch or between the two versions are merged into the working file.
4616If this results in any conflicts, they may be resolved interactively,
4617using ediff.
4618
4619** Changes in Font Lock
4620
4621*** The face and variable previously known as font-lock-reference-face
4622are now called font-lock-constant-face to better reflect their typical
4623use for highlighting constants and labels. (Its face properties are
4624unchanged.) The variable font-lock-reference-face remains for now for
4625compatibility reasons, but its value is font-lock-constant-face.
4626
4627** Frame name display changes
4628
4629*** The command set-frame-name lets you set the name of the current
4630frame. You can use the new command select-frame-by-name to select and
4631raise a frame; this is mostly useful on character-only terminals, or
4632when many frames are invisible or iconified.
4633
4634*** On character-only terminal (not a window system), changing the
4635frame name is now reflected on the mode line and in the Buffers/Frames
4636menu.
4637
4638** Comint (subshell) changes
4639
4640*** In Comint modes, the commands to kill, stop or interrupt a
4641subjob now also kill pending input. This is for compatibility
4642with ordinary shells, where the signal characters do this.
4643
4644*** There are new commands in Comint mode.
4645
4646C-c C-x fetches the "next" line from the input history;
4647that is, the line after the last line you got.
4648You can use this command to fetch successive lines, one by one.
4649
4650C-c SPC accumulates lines of input. More precisely, it arranges to
4651send the current line together with the following line, when you send
4652the following line.
4653
4654C-c C-a if repeated twice consecutively now moves to the process mark,
4655which separates the pending input from the subprocess output and the
4656previously sent input.
4657
4658C-c M-r now runs comint-previous-matching-input-from-input;
4659it searches for a previous command, using the current pending input
4660as the search string.
4661
4662*** New option compilation-scroll-output can be set to scroll
4663automatically in compilation-mode windows.
4664
4665** C mode changes
4666
4667*** Multiline macros are now handled, both as they affect indentation,
4668and as recognized syntax. New syntactic symbol cpp-macro-cont is
4669assigned to second and subsequent lines of a multiline macro
4670definition.
4671
4672*** A new style "user" which captures all non-hook-ified
4673(i.e. top-level) .emacs file variable settings and customizations.
4674Style "cc-mode" is an alias for "user" and is deprecated. "gnu"
4675style is still the default however.
4676
4677*** "java" style now conforms to Sun's JDK coding style.
4678
4679*** There are new commands c-beginning-of-defun, c-end-of-defun which
4680are alternatives which you could bind to C-M-a and C-M-e if you prefer
4681them. They do not have key bindings by default.
4682
4683*** New and improved implementations of M-a (c-beginning-of-statement)
4684and M-e (c-end-of-statement).
4685
4686*** C++ namespace blocks are supported, with new syntactic symbols
4687namespace-open, namespace-close, and innamespace.
4688
4689*** File local variable settings of c-file-style and c-file-offsets
4690makes the style variables local to that buffer only.
4691
4692*** New indentation functions c-lineup-close-paren,
4693c-indent-one-line-block, c-lineup-dont-change.
4694
4695*** Improvements (hopefully!) to the way CC Mode is loaded. You
4696should now be able to do a (require 'cc-mode) to get the entire
4697package loaded properly for customization in your .emacs file. A new
4698variable c-initialize-on-load controls this and is t by default.
4699
4700** Changes to hippie-expand.
4701
4702*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-skip-space'. If
4703non-nil, trailing spaces may be included in the abbreviation to search for,
4704which then gives the same behavior as the original `dabbrev-expand'.
4705
4706*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-dabbrev-as-symbol'. If
4707non-nil, characters of syntax '_' is considered part of the word when
4708expanding dynamically.
4709
4710*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-no-restriction'. If
4711non-nil, narrowed buffers are widened before they are searched.
4712
4713*** New customization variable `hippie-expand-only-buffers'. If
4714non-empty, buffers searched are restricted to the types specified in
4715this list. Useful for example when constructing new special-purpose
4716expansion functions with `make-hippie-expand-function'.
4717
4718*** Text properties of the expansion are no longer copied.
4719
4720** Changes in BibTeX mode.
4721
4722*** Any titleword matching a regexp in the new variable
4723bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore (case sensitive) is ignored during
4724automatic key generation. This replaces variable
4725bibtex-autokey-titleword-first-ignore, which only checked for matches
4726against the first word in the title.
4727
4728*** Autokey generation now uses all words from the title, not just
4729capitalized words. To avoid conflicts with existing customizations,
4730bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore is set up such that words starting with
4731lowerkey characters will still be ignored. Thus, if you want to use
4732lowercase words from the title, you will have to overwrite the
4733bibtex-autokey-titleword-ignore standard setting.
4734
4735*** Case conversion of names and title words for automatic key
4736generation is more flexible. Variable bibtex-autokey-preserve-case is
4737replaced by bibtex-autokey-titleword-case-convert and
4738bibtex-autokey-name-case-convert.
4739
4740** Changes in vcursor.el.
4741
4742*** Support for character terminals is available: there is a new keymap
4743and the vcursor will appear as an arrow between buffer text. A
4744variable `vcursor-interpret-input' allows input from the vcursor to be
4745entered exactly as if typed. Numerous functions, including
4746`vcursor-compare-windows', have been rewritten to improve consistency
4747in the selection of windows and corresponding keymaps.
4748
4749*** vcursor options can now be altered with M-x customize under the
4750Editing group once the package is loaded.
4751
4752*** Loading vcursor now does not define keys by default, as this is
4753generally a bad side effect. Use M-x customize to set
4754vcursor-key-bindings to t to restore the old behaviour.
4755
4756*** vcursor-auto-disable can be `copy', which turns off copying from the
4757vcursor, but doesn't disable it, after any non-vcursor command.
4758
4759** Ispell changes.
4760
4761*** You can now spell check comments and strings in the current
4762buffer with M-x ispell-comments-and-strings. Comments and strings
4763are identified by syntax tables in effect.
4764
4765*** Generic region skipping implemented.
4766A single buffer can be broken into a number of regions where text will
4767and will not be checked. The definitions of the regions can be user
4768defined. New applications and improvements made available by this
4769include:
4770
4771 o URLs are automatically skipped
4772 o EMail message checking is vastly improved.
4773
4774*** Ispell can highlight the erroneous word even on non-window terminals.
4775
4776** Changes to RefTeX mode
4777
4778RefTeX has been updated in order to make it more usable with very
4779large projects (like a several volume math book). The parser has been
4780re-written from scratch. To get maximum speed from RefTeX, check the
4781section `Optimizations' in the manual.
4782
4783*** New recursive parser.
4784
4785The old version of RefTeX created a single large buffer containing the
4786entire multifile document in order to parse the document. The new
4787recursive parser scans the individual files.
4788
4789*** Parsing only part of a document.
4790
4791Reparsing of changed document parts can now be made faster by enabling
4792partial scans. To use this feature, read the documentation string of
4793the variable `reftex-enable-partial-scans' and set the variable to t.
4794
4795 (setq reftex-enable-partial-scans t)
4796
4797*** Storing parsing information in a file.
4798
4799This can improve startup times considerably. To turn it on, use
4800
4801 (setq reftex-save-parse-info t)
4802
4803*** Using multiple selection buffers
4804
4805If the creation of label selection buffers is too slow (this happens
4806for large documents), you can reuse these buffers by setting
4807
4808 (setq reftex-use-multiple-selection-buffers t)
4809
4810*** References to external documents.
4811
4812The LaTeX package `xr' allows to cross-reference labels in external
4813documents. RefTeX can provide information about the external
4814documents as well. To use this feature, set up the \externaldocument
4815macros required by the `xr' package and rescan the document with
4816RefTeX. The external labels can then be accessed with the `x' key in
4817the selection buffer provided by `reftex-reference' (bound to `C-c )').
4818The `x' key also works in the table of contents buffer.
4819
4820*** Many more labeled LaTeX environments are recognized by default.
4821
4822The builtin command list now covers all the standard LaTeX commands,
4823and all of the major packages included in the LaTeX distribution.
4824
4825Also, RefTeX now understands the \appendix macro and changes
4826the enumeration of sections in the *toc* buffer accordingly.
4827
4828*** Mouse support for selection and *toc* buffers
4829
4830The mouse can now be used to select items in the selection and *toc*
4831buffers. See also the new option `reftex-highlight-selection'.
4832
4833*** New keymaps for selection and table of contents modes.
4834
4835The selection processes for labels and citation keys, and the table of
4836contents buffer now have their own keymaps: `reftex-select-label-map',
4837`reftex-select-bib-map', `reftex-toc-map'. The selection processes
4838have a number of new keys predefined. In particular, TAB lets you
4839enter a label with completion. Check the on-the-fly help (press `?'
4840at the selection prompt) or read the Info documentation to find out
4841more.
4842
4843*** Support for the varioref package
4844
4845The `v' key in the label selection buffer toggles \ref versus \vref.
4846
4847*** New hooks
4848
4849Three new hooks can be used to redefine the way labels, references,
4850and citations are created. These hooks are
4851`reftex-format-label-function', `reftex-format-ref-function',
4852`reftex-format-cite-function'.
4853
4854*** Citations outside LaTeX
4855
4856The command `reftex-citation' may also be used outside LaTeX (e.g. in
4857a mail buffer). See the Info documentation for details.
4858
4859*** Short context is no longer fontified.
4860
4861The short context in the label menu no longer copies the
4862fontification from the text in the buffer. If you prefer it to be
4863fontified, use
4864
4865 (setq reftex-refontify-context t)
4866
4867** file-cache-minibuffer-complete now accepts a prefix argument.
4868With a prefix argument, it does not try to do completion of
4869the file name within its directory; it only checks for other
4870directories that contain the same file name.
4871
4872Thus, given the file name Makefile, and assuming that a file
4873Makefile.in exists in the same directory, ordinary
4874file-cache-minibuffer-complete will try to complete Makefile to
4875Makefile.in and will therefore never look for other directories that
4876have Makefile. A prefix argument tells it not to look for longer
4877names such as Makefile.in, so that instead it will look for other
4878directories--just as if the name were already complete in its present
4879directory.
4880
4881** New modes and packages
4882
4883*** There is a new alternative major mode for Perl, Cperl mode.
4884It has many more features than Perl mode, and some people prefer
4885it, but some do not.
4886
4887*** There is a new major mode, M-x vhdl-mode, for editing files of VHDL
4888code.
4889
4890*** M-x which-function-mode enables a minor mode that displays the
4891current function name continuously in the mode line, as you move
4892around in a buffer.
4893
4894Which Function mode is effective in major modes which support Imenu.
4895
4896*** Gametree is a major mode for editing game analysis trees. The author
4897uses it for keeping notes about his postal Chess games, but it should
4898be helpful for other two-player games as well, as long as they have an
4899established system of notation similar to Chess.
4900
4901*** The new minor mode checkdoc-minor-mode provides Emacs Lisp
4902documentation string checking for style and spelling. The style
4903guidelines are found in the Emacs Lisp programming manual.
4904
4905*** The net-utils package makes some common networking features
4906available in Emacs. Some of these functions are wrappers around
4907system utilities (ping, nslookup, etc); others are implementations of
4908simple protocols (finger, whois) in Emacs Lisp. There are also
4909functions to make simple connections to TCP/IP ports for debugging and
4910the like.
4911
4912*** highlight-changes-mode is a minor mode that uses colors to
4913identify recently changed parts of the buffer text.
4914
4915*** The new package `midnight' lets you specify things to be done
4916within Emacs at midnight--by default, kill buffers that you have not
4917used in a considerable time. To use this feature, customize
4918the user option `midnight-mode' to t.
4919
4920*** The file generic-x.el defines a number of simple major modes.
4921
4922 apache-generic-mode: For Apache and NCSA httpd configuration files
4923 samba-generic-mode: Samba configuration files
4924 fvwm-generic-mode: For fvwm initialization files
4925 x-resource-generic-mode: For X resource files
4926 hosts-generic-mode: For hosts files (.rhosts, /etc/hosts, etc)
4927 mailagent-rules-generic-mode: For mailagent .rules files
4928 javascript-generic-mode: For JavaScript files
4929 vrml-generic-mode: For VRML files
4930 java-manifest-generic-mode: For Java MANIFEST files
4931 java-properties-generic-mode: For Java property files
4932 mailrc-generic-mode: For .mailrc files
4933
4934 Platform-specific modes:
4935
4936 prototype-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V prototype files
4937 pkginfo-generic-mode: For Solaris/Sys V pkginfo files
4938 alias-generic-mode: For C shell alias files
4939 inf-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INF files
4940 ini-generic-mode: For MS-Windows INI files
4941 reg-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Registry files
4942 bat-generic-mode: For MS-Windows BAT scripts
4943 rc-generic-mode: For MS-Windows Resource files
4944 rul-generic-mode: For InstallShield scripts
4945\f
4946* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 since the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4947
4948** If you want a Lisp file to be read in unibyte mode,
4949use -*-unibyte: t;-*- on its first line.
4950That will force Emacs to read that file in unibyte mode.
4951Otherwise, the file will be loaded and byte-compiled in multibyte mode.
4952
4953Thus, each lisp file is read in a consistent way regardless of whether
4954you started Emacs with --unibyte, so that a Lisp program gives
4955consistent results regardless of how Emacs was started.
4956
4957** The new function assoc-default is useful for searching an alist,
4958and using a default value if the key is not found there. You can
4959specify a comparison predicate, so this function is useful for
4960searching comparing a string against an alist of regular expressions.
4961
4962** The functions unibyte-char-to-multibyte and
4963multibyte-char-to-unibyte convert between unibyte and multibyte
4964character codes, in a way that is appropriate for the current language
4965environment.
4966
4967** The functions read-event, read-char and read-char-exclusive now
4968take two optional arguments. PROMPT, if non-nil, specifies a prompt
4969string. SUPPRESS-INPUT-METHOD, if non-nil, says to disable the
4970current input method for reading this one event.
4971
4972** Two new variables print-escape-nonascii and print-escape-multibyte
4973now control whether to output certain characters as
4974backslash-sequences. print-escape-nonascii applies to single-byte
4975non-ASCII characters; print-escape-multibyte applies to multibyte
4976characters. Both of these variables are used only when printing
4977in readable fashion (prin1 uses them, princ does not).
4978\f
4979* Lisp changes in Emacs 20.3 before the Emacs Lisp Manual was published
4980
4981** Compiled Emacs Lisp files made with the modified "MBSK" version
4982of Emacs 20.2 do not work in Emacs 20.3.
4983
4984** Buffer positions are now measured in characters, as they were
4985in Emacs 19 and before. This means that (forward-char 1)
4986always increases point by 1.
4987
4988The function chars-in-region now just subtracts its arguments. It is
4989considered obsolete. The function char-boundary-p has been deleted.
4990
4991See below for additional changes relating to multibyte characters.
4992
4993** defcustom, defface and defgroup now accept the keyword `:version'.
4994Use this to specify in which version of Emacs a certain variable's
4995default value changed. For example,
4996
4997 (defcustom foo-max 34 "*Maximum number of foo's allowed."
4998 :type 'integer
4999 :group 'foo
5000 :version "20.3")
5001
5002 (defgroup foo-group nil "The foo group."
5003 :version "20.3")
5004
5005If an entire new group is added or the variables in it have the
5006default values changed, then just add a `:version' to that group. It
5007is recommended that new packages added to the distribution contain a
5008`:version' in the top level group.
5009
5010This information is used to control the customize-changed-options command.
5011
5012** It is now an error to change the value of a symbol whose name
5013starts with a colon--if it is interned in the standard obarray.
5014
5015However, setting such a symbol to its proper value, which is that
5016symbol itself, is not an error. This is for the sake of programs that
5017support previous Emacs versions by explicitly setting these variables
5018to themselves.
5019
5020If you set the variable keyword-symbols-constant-flag to nil,
5021this error is suppressed, and you can set these symbols to any
5022values whatever.
5023
5024** There is a new debugger command, R.
5025It evaluates an expression like e, but saves the result
5026in the buffer *Debugger-record*.
5027
5028** Frame-local variables.
5029
5030You can now make a variable local to various frames. To do this, call
5031the function make-variable-frame-local; this enables frames to have
5032local bindings for that variable.
5033
5034These frame-local bindings are actually frame parameters: you create a
5035frame-local binding in a specific frame by calling
5036modify-frame-parameters and specifying the variable name as the
5037parameter name.
5038
5039Buffer-local bindings take precedence over frame-local bindings.
5040Thus, if the current buffer has a buffer-local binding, that binding is
5041active; otherwise, if the selected frame has a frame-local binding,
5042that binding is active; otherwise, the default binding is active.
5043
5044It would not be hard to implement window-local bindings, but it is not
5045clear that this would be very useful; windows tend to come and go in a
5046very transitory fashion, so that trying to produce any specific effect
5047through a window-local binding would not be very robust.
5048
5049** `sregexq' and `sregex' are two new functions for constructing
5050"symbolic regular expressions." These are Lisp expressions that, when
5051evaluated, yield conventional string-based regexps. The symbolic form
5052makes it easier to construct, read, and maintain complex patterns.
5053See the documentation in sregex.el.
5054
5055** parse-partial-sexp's return value has an additional element which
5056is used to pass information along if you pass it to another call to
5057parse-partial-sexp, starting its scan where the first call ended.
5058The contents of this field are not yet finalized.
5059
5060** eval-region now accepts a fourth optional argument READ-FUNCTION.
5061If it is non-nil, that function is used instead of `read'.
5062
5063** unload-feature by default removes the feature's functions from
5064known hooks to avoid trouble, but a package providing FEATURE can
5065define a hook FEATURE-unload-hook to be run by unload-feature instead.
5066
5067** read-from-minibuffer no longer returns the argument DEFAULT-VALUE
5068when the user enters empty input. It now returns the null string, as
5069it did in Emacs 19. The default value is made available in the
5070history via M-n, but it is not applied here as a default.
5071
5072The other, more specialized minibuffer-reading functions continue to
5073return the default value (not the null string) when the user enters
5074empty input.
5075
5076** The new variable read-buffer-function controls which routine to use
5077for selecting buffers. For example, if you set this variable to
5078`iswitchb-read-buffer', iswitchb will be used to read buffer names.
5079Other functions can also be used if they accept the same arguments as
5080`read-buffer' and return the selected buffer name as a string.
5081
5082** The new function read-passwd reads a password from the terminal,
5083echoing a period for each character typed. It takes three arguments:
5084a prompt string, a flag which says "read it twice to make sure", and a
5085default password to use if the user enters nothing.
5086
5087** The variable fill-nobreak-predicate gives major modes a way to
5088specify not to break a line at certain places. Its value is a
5089function which is called with no arguments, with point located at the
5090place where a break is being considered. If the function returns
5091non-nil, then the line won't be broken there.
5092
5093** window-end now takes an optional second argument, UPDATE.
5094If this is non-nil, then the function always returns an accurate
5095up-to-date value for the buffer position corresponding to the
5096end of the window, even if this requires computation.
5097
5098** other-buffer now takes an optional argument FRAME
5099which specifies which frame's buffer list to use.
5100If it is nil, that means use the selected frame's buffer list.
5101
5102** The new variable buffer-display-time, always local in every buffer,
5103holds the value of (current-time) as of the last time that a window
5104was directed to display this buffer.
5105
5106** It is now meaningful to compare two window-configuration objects
5107with `equal'. Two window-configuration objects are equal if they
5108describe equivalent arrangements of windows, in the same frame--in
5109other words, if they would give the same results if passed to
5110set-window-configuration.
5111
5112** compare-window-configurations is a new function that compares two
5113window configurations loosely. It ignores differences in saved buffer
5114positions and scrolling, and considers only the structure and sizes of
5115windows and the choice of buffers to display.
5116
5117** The variable minor-mode-overriding-map-alist allows major modes to
5118override the key bindings of a minor mode. The elements of this alist
5119look like the elements of minor-mode-map-alist: (VARIABLE . KEYMAP).
5120
5121If the VARIABLE in an element of minor-mode-overriding-map-alist has a
5122non-nil value, the paired KEYMAP is active, and totally overrides the
5123map (if any) specified for the same variable in minor-mode-map-alist.
5124
5125minor-mode-overriding-map-alist is automatically local in all buffers,
5126and it is meant to be set by major modes.
5127
5128** The function match-string-no-properties is like match-string
5129except that it discards all text properties from the result.
5130
5131** The function load-average now accepts an optional argument
5132USE-FLOATS. If it is non-nil, the load average values are returned as
5133floating point numbers, rather than as integers to be divided by 100.
5134
5135** The new variable temporary-file-directory specifies the directory
5136to use for creating temporary files. The default value is determined
5137in a reasonable way for your operating system; on GNU and Unix systems
5138it is based on the TMP and TMPDIR environment variables.
5139
5140** Menu changes
5141
5142*** easymenu.el now uses the new menu item format and supports the
5143keywords :visible and :filter. The existing keyword :keys is now
5144better supported.
5145
5146The variable `easy-menu-precalculate-equivalent-keybindings' controls
5147a new feature which calculates keyboard equivalents for the menu when
5148you define the menu. The default is t. If you rarely use menus, you
5149can set the variable to nil to disable this precalculation feature;
5150then the calculation is done only if you use the menu bar.
5151
5152*** A new format for menu items is supported.
5153
5154In a keymap, a key binding that has the format
5155 (STRING . REAL-BINDING) or (STRING HELP-STRING . REAL-BINDING)
5156defines a menu item. Now a menu item definition may also be a list that
5157starts with the symbol `menu-item'.
5158
5159The format is:
5160 (menu-item ITEM-NAME) or
5161 (menu-item ITEM-NAME REAL-BINDING . ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST)
5162where ITEM-NAME is an expression which evaluates to the menu item
5163string, and ITEM-PROPERTY-LIST has the form of a property list.
5164The supported properties include
5165
5166:enable FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5167 item is enabled.
5168:visible FORM Evaluate FORM to determine whether the
5169 item should appear in the menu.
5170:filter FILTER-FN
5171 FILTER-FN is a function of one argument,
5172 which will be REAL-BINDING.
5173 It should return a binding to use instead.
5174:keys DESCRIPTION
5175 DESCRIPTION is a string that describes an equivalent keyboard
5176 binding for for REAL-BINDING. DESCRIPTION is expanded with
5177 `substitute-command-keys' before it is used.
5178:key-sequence KEY-SEQUENCE
5179 KEY-SEQUENCE is a key-sequence for an equivalent
5180 keyboard binding.
5181:key-sequence nil
5182 This means that the command normally has no
5183 keyboard equivalent.
5184:help HELP HELP is the extra help string (not currently used).
5185:button (TYPE . SELECTED)
5186 TYPE is :toggle or :radio.
5187 SELECTED is a form, to be evaluated, and its
5188 value says whether this button is currently selected.
5189
5190Buttons are at the moment only simulated by prefixes in the menu.
5191Eventually ordinary X-buttons may be supported.
5192
5193(menu-item ITEM-NAME) defines unselectable item.
5194
5195** New event types
5196
5197*** The new event type `mouse-wheel' is generated by a wheel on a
5198mouse (such as the MS Intellimouse). The event contains a delta that
5199corresponds to the amount and direction that the wheel is rotated,
5200which is typically used to implement a scroll or zoom. The format is:
5201
5202 (mouse-wheel POSITION DELTA)
5203
5204where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5205same format as a mouse-click event, and DELTA is a signed number
5206indicating the number of increments by which the wheel was rotated. A
5207negative DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated backwards, towards
5208the user, and a positive DELTA indicates that the wheel was rotated
5209forward, away from the user.
5210
5211As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5212
5213*** The new event type `drag-n-drop' is generated when a group of
5214files is selected in an application outside of Emacs, and then dragged
5215and dropped onto an Emacs frame. The event contains a list of
5216filenames that were dragged and dropped, which are then typically
5217loaded into Emacs. The format is:
5218
5219 (drag-n-drop POSITION FILES)
5220
5221where POSITION is a list describing the position of the event in the
5222same format as a mouse-click event, and FILES is the list of filenames
5223that were dragged and dropped.
5224
5225As of now, this event type is generated only on MS Windows.
5226
5227** Changes relating to multibyte characters.
5228
5229*** The variable enable-multibyte-characters is now read-only;
5230any attempt to set it directly signals an error. The only way
5231to change this value in an existing buffer is with set-buffer-multibyte.
5232
5233*** In a string constant, `\ ' now stands for "nothing at all". You
5234can use it to terminate a hex escape which is followed by a character
5235that could otherwise be read as part of the hex escape.
5236
5237*** String indices are now measured in characters, as they were
5238in Emacs 19 and before.
5239
5240The function chars-in-string has been deleted.
5241The function concat-chars has been renamed to `string'.
5242
5243*** The function set-buffer-multibyte sets the flag in the current
5244buffer that says whether the buffer uses multibyte representation or
5245unibyte representation. If the argument is nil, it selects unibyte
5246representation. Otherwise it selects multibyte representation.
5247
5248This function does not change the contents of the buffer, viewed
5249as a sequence of bytes. However, it does change the contents
5250viewed as characters; a sequence of two bytes which is treated as
5251one character when the buffer uses multibyte representation
5252will count as two characters using unibyte representation.
5253
5254This function sets enable-multibyte-characters to record which
5255representation is in use. It also adjusts various data in the buffer
5256(including its markers, overlays and text properties) so that they are
5257consistent with the new representation.
5258
5259*** string-make-multibyte takes a string and converts it to multibyte
5260representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care
5261about the representation, because Emacs converts when necessary;
5262however, it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5263
5264The conversion of non-ASCII characters works by adding the value of
5265nonascii-insert-offset to each character, or by translating them
5266using the table nonascii-translation-table.
5267
5268*** string-make-unibyte takes a string and converts it to unibyte
5269representation. Most of the time, you don't need to care about the
5270representation, but it makes a difference when you compare strings.
5271
5272The conversion from multibyte to unibyte representation
5273loses information; the only time Emacs performs it automatically
5274is when inserting a multibyte string into a unibyte buffer.
5275
5276*** string-as-multibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5277which contains the same bytes, but treats them as multibyte.
5278
5279*** string-as-unibyte takes a string, and returns another string
5280which contains the same bytes, but treats them as unibyte.
5281
5282*** The new function compare-strings lets you compare
5283portions of two strings. Unibyte strings are converted to multibyte,
5284so that a unibyte string can match a multibyte string.
5285You can specify whether to ignore case or not.
5286
5287*** assoc-ignore-case now uses compare-strings so that
5288it can treat unibyte and multibyte strings as equal.
5289
5290*** Regular expression operations and buffer string searches now
5291convert the search pattern to multibyte or unibyte to accord with the
5292buffer or string being searched.
5293
5294One consequence is that you cannot always use \200-\377 inside of
5295[...] to match all non-ASCII characters. This does still work when
5296searching or matching a unibyte buffer or string, but not when
5297searching or matching a multibyte string. Unfortunately, there is no
5298obvious choice of syntax to use within [...] for that job. But, what
5299you want is just to match all non-ASCII characters, the regular
5300expression [^\0-\177] works for it.
5301
5302*** Structure of coding system changed.
5303
5304All coding systems (including aliases and subsidiaries) are named
5305by symbols; the symbol's `coding-system' property is a vector
5306which defines the coding system. Aliases share the same vector
5307as the principal name, so that altering the contents of this
5308vector affects the principal name and its aliases. You can define
5309your own alias name of a coding system by the function
5310define-coding-system-alias.
5311
5312The coding system definition includes a property list of its own. Use
5313the new functions `coding-system-get' and `coding-system-put' to
5314access such coding system properties as post-read-conversion,
5315pre-write-conversion, character-translation-table-for-decode,
5316character-translation-table-for-encode, mime-charset, and
5317safe-charsets. For instance, (coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1
5318'mime-charset) gives the corresponding MIME-charset parameter
5319`iso-8859-1'.
5320
5321Among the coding system properties listed above, safe-charsets is new.
5322The value of this property is a list of character sets which this
5323coding system can correctly encode and decode. For instance:
5324(coding-system-get 'iso-latin-1 'safe-charsets) => (ascii latin-iso8859-1)
5325
5326Here, "correctly encode" means that the encoded character sets can
5327also be handled safely by systems other than Emacs as far as they
5328are capable of that coding system. Though, Emacs itself can encode
5329the other character sets and read it back correctly.
5330
5331*** The new function select-safe-coding-system can be used to find a
5332proper coding system for encoding the specified region or string.
5333This function requires a user interaction.
5334
5335*** The new functions find-coding-systems-region and
5336find-coding-systems-string are helper functions used by
5337select-safe-coding-system. They return a list of all proper coding
5338systems to encode a text in some region or string. If you don't want
5339a user interaction, use one of these functions instead of
5340select-safe-coding-system.
5341
5342*** The explicit encoding and decoding functions, such as
5343decode-coding-region and encode-coding-string, now set
5344last-coding-system-used to reflect the actual way encoding or decoding
5345was done.
5346
5347*** The new function detect-coding-with-language-environment can be
5348used to detect a coding system of text according to priorities of
5349coding systems used by some specific language environment.
5350
5351*** The functions detect-coding-region and detect-coding-string always
5352return a list if the arg HIGHEST is nil. Thus, if only ASCII
5353characters are found, they now return a list of single element
5354`undecided' or its subsidiaries.
5355
5356*** The new functions coding-system-change-eol-conversion and
5357coding-system-change-text-conversion can be used to get a different
5358coding system than what specified only in how end-of-line or text is
5359converted.
5360
5361*** The new function set-selection-coding-system can be used to set a
5362coding system for communicating with other X clients.
5363
5364*** The function `map-char-table' now passes as argument only valid
5365character codes, plus generic characters that stand for entire
5366character sets or entire subrows of a character set. In other words,
5367each time `map-char-table' calls its FUNCTION argument, the key value
5368either will be a valid individual character code, or will stand for a
5369range of characters.
5370
5371*** The new function `char-valid-p' can be used for checking whether a
5372Lisp object is a valid character code or not.
5373
5374*** The new function `charset-after' returns a charset of a character
5375in the current buffer at position POS.
5376
5377*** Input methods are now implemented using the variable
5378input-method-function. If this is non-nil, its value should be a
5379function; then, whenever Emacs reads an input event that is a printing
5380character with no modifier bits, it calls that function, passing the
5381event as an argument. Often this function will read more input, first
5382binding input-method-function to nil.
5383
5384The return value should be a list of the events resulting from input
5385method processing. These events will be processed sequentially as
5386input, before resorting to unread-command-events. Events returned by
5387the input method function are not passed to the input method function,
5388not even if they are printing characters with no modifier bits.
5389
5390The input method function is not called when reading the second and
5391subsequent events of a key sequence.
5392
5393*** You can customize any language environment by using
5394set-language-environment-hook and exit-language-environment-hook.
5395
5396The hook `exit-language-environment-hook' should be used to undo
5397customizations that you made with set-language-environment-hook. For
5398instance, if you set up a special key binding for a specific language
5399environment by set-language-environment-hook, you should set up
5400exit-language-environment-hook to restore the normal key binding.
5401\f
5402* Changes in Emacs 20.1
5403
5404** Emacs has a new facility for customization of its many user
5405options. It is called M-x customize. With this facility you can look
5406at the many user options in an organized way; they are grouped into a
5407tree structure.
5408
5409M-x customize also knows what sorts of values are legitimate for each
5410user option and ensures that you don't use invalid values.
5411
5412With M-x customize, you can set options either for the present Emacs
5413session or permanently. (Permanent settings are stored automatically
5414in your .emacs file.)
5415
5416** Scroll bars are now on the left side of the window.
5417You can change this with M-x customize-option scroll-bar-mode.
5418
5419** The mode line no longer includes the string `Emacs'.
5420This makes more space in the mode line for other information.
5421
5422** When you select a region with the mouse, it is highlighted
5423immediately afterward. At that time, if you type the DELETE key, it
5424kills the region.
5425
5426The BACKSPACE key, and the ASCII character DEL, do not do this; they
5427delete the character before point, as usual.
5428
5429** In an incremental search the whole current match is highlighted
5430on terminals which support this. (You can disable this feature
5431by setting search-highlight to nil.)
5432
5433** In the minibuffer, in some cases, you can now use M-n to
5434insert the default value into the minibuffer as text. In effect,
5435the default value (if the minibuffer routines know it) is tacked
5436onto the history "in the future". (The more normal use of the
5437history list is to use M-p to insert minibuffer input used in the
5438past.)
5439
5440** In Text mode, now only blank lines separate paragraphs.
5441This makes it possible to get the full benefit of Adaptive Fill mode
5442in Text mode, and other modes derived from it (such as Mail mode).
5443TAB in Text mode now runs the command indent-relative; this
5444makes a practical difference only when you use indented paragraphs.
5445
5446As a result, the old Indented Text mode is now identical to Text mode,
5447and is an alias for it.
5448
5449If you want spaces at the beginning of a line to start a paragraph,
5450use the new mode, Paragraph Indent Text mode.
5451
5452** Scrolling changes
5453
5454*** Scroll commands to scroll a whole screen now preserve the screen
5455position of the cursor, if scroll-preserve-screen-position is non-nil.
5456
5457In this mode, if you scroll several screens back and forth, finishing
5458on the same screen where you started, the cursor goes back to the line
5459where it started.
5460
5461*** If you set scroll-conservatively to a small number, then when you
5462move point a short distance off the screen, Emacs will scroll the
5463screen just far enough to bring point back on screen, provided that
5464does not exceed `scroll-conservatively' lines.
5465
5466*** The new variable scroll-margin says how close point can come to the
5467top or bottom of a window. It is a number of screen lines; if point
5468comes within that many lines of the top or bottom of the window, Emacs
5469recenters the window.
5470
5471** International character set support (MULE)
5472
5473Emacs now supports a wide variety of international character sets,
5474including European variants of the Latin alphabet, as well as Chinese,
5475Devanagari (Hindi and Marathi), Ethiopian, Greek, IPA, Japanese,
5476Korean, Lao, Russian, Thai, Tibetan, and Vietnamese scripts. These
5477features have been merged from the modified version of Emacs known as
5478MULE (for "MULti-lingual Enhancement to GNU Emacs")
5479
5480Users of these scripts have established many more-or-less standard
5481coding systems for storing files. Emacs uses a single multibyte
5482character encoding within Emacs buffers; it can translate from a wide
5483variety of coding systems when reading a file and can translate back
5484into any of these coding systems when saving a file.
5485
5486Keyboards, even in the countries where these character sets are used,
5487generally don't have keys for all the characters in them. So Emacs
5488supports various "input methods", typically one for each script or
5489language, to make it possible to type them.
5490
5491The Emacs internal multibyte encoding represents a non-ASCII
5492character as a sequence of bytes in the range 0200 through 0377.
5493
5494The new prefix key C-x RET is used for commands that pertain
5495to multibyte characters, coding systems, and input methods.
5496
5497You can disable multibyte character support as follows:
5498
5499 (setq-default enable-multibyte-characters nil)
5500
5501Calling the function standard-display-european turns off multibyte
5502characters, unless you specify a non-nil value for the second
5503argument, AUTO. This provides compatibility for people who are
5504already using standard-display-european to continue using unibyte
5505characters for their work until they want to change.
5506
5507*** Input methods
5508
5509An input method is a kind of character conversion which is designed
5510specifically for interactive input. In Emacs, typically each language
5511has its own input method (though sometimes several languages which use
5512the same characters can share one input method). Some languages
5513support several input methods.
5514
5515The simplest kind of input method works by mapping ASCII letters into
5516another alphabet. This is how the Greek and Russian input methods
5517work.
5518
5519A more powerful technique is composition: converting sequences of
5520characters into one letter. Many European input methods use
5521composition to produce a single non-ASCII letter from a sequence which
5522consists of a letter followed by diacritics. For example, a' is one
5523sequence of two characters that might be converted into a single
5524letter.
5525
5526The input methods for syllabic scripts typically use mapping followed
5527by conversion. The input methods for Thai and Korean work this way.
5528First, letters are mapped into symbols for particular sounds or tone
5529marks; then, sequences of these which make up a whole syllable are
5530mapped into one syllable sign--most often a "composite character".
5531
5532None of these methods works very well for Chinese and Japanese, so
5533they are handled specially. First you input a whole word using
5534phonetic spelling; then, after the word is in the buffer, Emacs
5535converts it into one or more characters using a large dictionary.
5536
5537Since there is more than one way to represent a phonetically spelled
5538word using Chinese characters, Emacs can only guess which one to use;
5539typically these input methods give you a way to say "guess again" if
5540the first guess is wrong.
5541
5542*** The command C-x RET m (toggle-enable-multibyte-characters)
5543turns multibyte character support on or off for the current buffer.
5544
5545If multibyte character support is turned off in a buffer, then each
5546byte is a single character, even codes 0200 through 0377--exactly as
5547they did in Emacs 19.34. This includes the features for support for
5548the European characters, ISO Latin-1 and ISO Latin-2.
5549
5550However, there is no need to turn off multibyte character support to
5551use ISO Latin-1 or ISO Latin-2; the Emacs multibyte character set
5552includes all the characters in these character sets, and Emacs can
5553translate automatically to and from either one.
5554
5555*** Visiting a file in unibyte mode.
5556
5557Turning off multibyte character support in the buffer after visiting a
5558file with multibyte code conversion will display the multibyte
5559sequences already in the buffer, byte by byte. This is probably not
5560what you want.
5561
5562If you want to edit a file of unibyte characters (Latin-1, for
5563example), you can do it by specifying `no-conversion' as the coding
5564system when reading the file. This coding system also turns off
5565multibyte characters in that buffer.
5566
5567If you turn off multibyte character support entirely, this turns off
5568character conversion as well.
5569
5570*** Displaying international characters on X Windows.
5571
5572A font for X typically displays just one alphabet or script.
5573Therefore, displaying the entire range of characters Emacs supports
5574requires using many fonts.
5575
5576Therefore, Emacs now supports "fontsets". Each fontset is a
5577collection of fonts, each assigned to a range of character codes.
5578
5579A fontset has a name, like a font. Individual fonts are defined by
5580the X server; fontsets are defined within Emacs itself. But once you
5581have defined a fontset, you can use it in a face or a frame just as
5582you would use a font.
5583
5584If a fontset specifies no font for a certain character, or if it
5585specifies a font that does not exist on your system, then it cannot
5586display that character. It will display an empty box instead.
5587
5588The fontset height and width are determined by the ASCII characters
5589(that is, by the font in the fontset which is used for ASCII
5590characters). If another font in the fontset has a different height,
5591or the wrong width, then characters assigned to that font are clipped,
5592and displayed within a box if highlight-wrong-size-font is non-nil.
5593
5594*** Defining fontsets.
5595
5596Emacs does not use any fontset by default. Its default font is still
5597chosen as in previous versions. You can tell Emacs to use a fontset
5598with the `-fn' option or the `Font' X resource.
5599
5600Emacs creates a standard fontset automatically according to the value
5601of standard-fontset-spec. This fontset's short name is
5602`fontset-standard'. Bold, italic, and bold-italic variants of the
5603standard fontset are created automatically.
5604
5605If you specify a default ASCII font with the `Font' resource or `-fn'
5606argument, a fontset is generated from it. This works by replacing the
5607FOUNDARY, FAMILY, ADD_STYLE, and AVERAGE_WIDTH fields of the font name
5608with `*' then using this to specify a fontset. This fontset's short
5609name is `fontset-startup'.
5610
5611Emacs checks resources of the form Fontset-N where N is 0, 1, 2...
5612The resource value should have this form:
5613 FONTSET-NAME, [CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME]...
5614FONTSET-NAME should have the form of a standard X font name, except:
5615 * most fields should be just the wild card "*".
5616 * the CHARSET_REGISTRY field should be "fontset"
5617 * the CHARSET_ENCODING field can be any nickname of the fontset.
5618The construct CHARSET-NAME:FONT-NAME can be repeated any number
5619of times; each time specifies the font for one character set.
5620CHARSET-NAME should be the name name of a character set, and
5621FONT-NAME should specify an actual font to use for that character set.
5622
5623Each of these fontsets has an alias which is made from the
5624last two font name fields, CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING.
5625You can refer to the fontset by that alias or by its full name.
5626
5627For any character sets that you don't mention, Emacs tries to choose a
5628font by substituting into FONTSET-NAME. For instance, with the
5629following resource,
5630 Emacs*Fontset-0: -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-*-*-*-*-fontset-24
5631the font for ASCII is generated as below:
5632 -*-fixed-medium-r-normal-*-24-*-ISO8859-1
5633Here is the substitution rule:
5634 Change CHARSET_REGISTRY and CHARSET_ENCODING to that of the charset
5635 defined in the variable x-charset-registries. For instance, ASCII has
5636 the entry (ascii . "ISO8859-1") in this variable. Then, reduce
5637 sequences of wild cards -*-...-*- with a single wildcard -*-.
5638 (This is to prevent use of auto-scaled fonts.)
5639
5640The function which processes the fontset resource value to create the
5641fontset is called create-fontset-from-fontset-spec. You can also call
5642that function explicitly to create a fontset.
5643
5644With the X resource Emacs.Font, you can specify a fontset name just
5645like an actual font name. But be careful not to specify a fontset
5646name in a wildcard resource like Emacs*Font--that tries to specify the
5647fontset for other purposes including menus, and they cannot handle
5648fontsets.
5649
5650*** The command M-x set-language-environment sets certain global Emacs
5651defaults for a particular choice of language.
5652
5653Selecting a language environment typically specifies a default input
5654method and which coding systems to recognize automatically when
5655visiting files. However, it does not try to reread files you have
5656already visited; the text in those buffers is not affected. The
5657language environment may also specify a default choice of coding
5658system for new files that you create.
5659
5660It makes no difference which buffer is current when you use
5661set-language-environment, because these defaults apply globally to the
5662whole Emacs session.
5663
5664For example, M-x set-language-environment RET Latin-1 RET
5665chooses the Latin-1 character set. In the .emacs file, you can do this
5666with (set-language-environment "Latin-1").
5667
5668*** The command C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system)
5669specifies the file coding system for the current buffer. This
5670specifies what sort of character code translation to do when saving
5671the file. As an argument, you must specify the name of one of the
5672coding systems that Emacs supports.
5673
5674*** The command C-x RET c (universal-coding-system-argument)
5675lets you specify a coding system when you read or write a file.
5676This command uses the minibuffer to read a coding system name.
5677After you exit the minibuffer, the specified coding system
5678is used for *the immediately following command*.
5679
5680So if the immediately following command is a command to read or
5681write a file, it uses the specified coding system for that file.
5682
5683If the immediately following command does not use the coding system,
5684then C-x RET c ultimately has no effect.
5685
5686For example, C-x RET c iso-8859-1 RET C-x C-f temp RET
5687visits the file `temp' treating it as ISO Latin-1.
5688
5689*** You can specify the coding system for a file using the -*-
5690construct. Include `coding: CODINGSYSTEM;' inside the -*-...-*-
5691to specify use of coding system CODINGSYSTEM. You can also
5692specify the coding system in a local variable list at the end
5693of the file.
5694
5695*** The command C-x RET t (set-terminal-coding-system) specifies
5696the coding system for terminal output. If you specify a character
5697code for terminal output, all characters output to the terminal are
5698translated into that character code.
5699
5700This feature is useful for certain character-only terminals built in
5701various countries to support the languages of those countries.
5702
5703By default, output to the terminal is not translated at all.
5704
5705*** The command C-x RET k (set-keyboard-coding-system) specifies
5706the coding system for keyboard input.
5707
5708Character code translation of keyboard input is useful for terminals
5709with keys that send non-ASCII graphic characters--for example,
5710some terminals designed for ISO Latin-1 or subsets of it.
5711
5712By default, keyboard input is not translated at all.
5713
5714Character code translation of keyboard input is similar to using an
5715input method, in that both define sequences of keyboard input that
5716translate into single characters. However, input methods are designed
5717to be convenient for interactive use, while the code translations are
5718designed to work with terminals.
5719
5720*** The command C-x RET p (set-buffer-process-coding-system)
5721specifies the coding system for input and output to a subprocess.
5722This command applies to the current buffer; normally, each subprocess
5723has its own buffer, and thus you can use this command to specify
5724translation to and from a particular subprocess by giving the command
5725in the corresponding buffer.
5726
5727By default, process input and output are not translated at all.
5728
5729*** The variable file-name-coding-system specifies the coding system
5730to use for encoding file names before operating on them.
5731It is also used for decoding file names obtained from the system.
5732
5733*** The command C-\ (toggle-input-method) activates or deactivates
5734an input method. If no input method has been selected before, the
5735command prompts for you to specify the language and input method you
5736want to use.
5737
5738C-u C-\ (select-input-method) lets you switch to a different input
5739method. C-h C-\ (or C-h I) describes the current input method.
5740
5741*** Some input methods remap the keyboard to emulate various keyboard
5742layouts commonly used for particular scripts. How to do this
5743remapping properly depends on your actual keyboard layout. To specify
5744which layout your keyboard has, use M-x quail-set-keyboard-layout.
5745
5746*** The command C-h C (describe-coding-system) displays
5747the coding systems currently selected for various purposes, plus
5748related information.
5749
5750*** The command C-h h (view-hello-file) displays a file called
5751HELLO, which has examples of text in many languages, using various
5752scripts.
5753
5754*** The command C-h L (describe-language-support) displays
5755information about the support for a particular language.
5756You specify the language as an argument.
5757
5758*** The mode line now contains a letter or character that identifies
5759the coding system used in the visited file. It normally follows the
5760first dash.
5761
5762A dash indicates the default state of affairs: no code conversion
5763(except CRLF => newline if appropriate). `=' means no conversion
5764whatsoever. The ISO 8859 coding systems are represented by digits
57651 through 9. Other coding systems are represented by letters:
5766
5767 A alternativnyj (Russian)
5768 B big5 (Chinese)
5769 C cn-gb-2312 (Chinese)
5770 C iso-2022-cn (Chinese)
5771 D in-is13194-devanagari (Indian languages)
5772 E euc-japan (Japanese)
5773 I iso-2022-cjk or iso-2022-ss2 (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5774 J junet (iso-2022-7) or old-jis (iso-2022-jp-1978-irv) (Japanese)
5775 K euc-korea (Korean)
5776 R koi8 (Russian)
5777 Q tibetan
5778 S shift_jis (Japanese)
5779 T lao
5780 T tis620 (Thai)
5781 V viscii or vscii (Vietnamese)
5782 i iso-2022-lock (Chinese, Japanese, Korean)
5783 k iso-2022-kr (Korean)
5784 v viqr (Vietnamese)
5785 z hz (Chinese)
5786
5787When you are using a character-only terminal (not a window system),
5788two additional characters appear in between the dash and the file
5789coding system. These two characters describe the coding system for
5790keyboard input, and the coding system for terminal output.
5791
5792*** The new variable rmail-file-coding-system specifies the code
5793conversion to use for RMAIL files. The default value is nil.
5794
5795When you read mail with Rmail, each message is decoded automatically
5796into Emacs' internal format. This has nothing to do with
5797rmail-file-coding-system. That variable controls reading and writing
5798Rmail files themselves.
5799
5800*** The new variable sendmail-coding-system specifies the code
5801conversion for outgoing mail. The default value is nil.
5802
5803Actually, there are three different ways of specifying the coding system
5804for sending mail:
5805
5806- If you use C-x RET f in the mail buffer, that takes priority.
5807- Otherwise, if you set sendmail-coding-system non-nil, that specifies it.
5808- Otherwise, the default coding system for new files is used,
5809 if that is non-nil. That comes from your language environment.
5810- Otherwise, Latin-1 is used.
5811
5812*** The command C-h t (help-with-tutorial) accepts a prefix argument
5813to specify the language for the tutorial file. Currently, English,
5814Japanese, Korean and Thai are supported. We welcome additional
5815translations.
5816
5817** An easy new way to visit a file with no code or format conversion
5818of any kind: Use M-x find-file-literally. There is also a command
5819insert-file-literally which inserts a file into the current buffer
5820without any conversion.
5821
5822** C-q's handling of octal character codes is changed.
5823You can now specify any number of octal digits.
5824RET terminates the digits and is discarded;
5825any other non-digit terminates the digits and is then used as input.
5826
5827** There are new commands for looking up Info documentation for
5828functions, variables and file names used in your programs.
5829
5830Type M-x info-lookup-symbol to look up a symbol in the buffer at point.
5831Type M-x info-lookup-file to look up a file in the buffer at point.
5832
5833Precisely which Info files are used to look it up depends on the major
5834mode. For example, in C mode, the GNU libc manual is used.
5835
5836** M-TAB in most programming language modes now runs the command
5837complete-symbol. This command performs completion on the symbol name
5838in the buffer before point.
5839
5840With a numeric argument, it performs completion based on the set of
5841symbols documented in the Info files for the programming language that
5842you are using.
5843
5844With no argument, it does completion based on the current tags tables,
5845just like the old binding of M-TAB (complete-tag).
5846
5847** File locking works with NFS now.
5848
5849The lock file for FILENAME is now a symbolic link named .#FILENAME,
5850in the same directory as FILENAME.
5851
5852This means that collision detection between two different machines now
5853works reasonably well; it also means that no file server or directory
5854can become a bottleneck.
5855
5856The new method does have drawbacks. It means that collision detection
5857does not operate when you edit a file in a directory where you cannot
5858create new files. Collision detection also doesn't operate when the
5859file server does not support symbolic links. But these conditions are
5860rare, and the ability to have collision detection while using NFS is
5861so useful that the change is worth while.
5862
5863When Emacs or a system crashes, this may leave behind lock files which
5864are stale. So you may occasionally get warnings about spurious
5865collisions. When you determine that the collision is spurious, just
5866tell Emacs to go ahead anyway.
5867
5868** If you wish to use Show Paren mode to display matching parentheses,
5869it is no longer sufficient to load paren.el. Instead you must call
5870show-paren-mode.
5871
5872** If you wish to use Delete Selection mode to replace a highlighted
5873selection when you insert new text, it is no longer sufficient to load
5874delsel.el. Instead you must call the function delete-selection-mode.
5875
5876** If you wish to use Partial Completion mode to complete partial words
5877within symbols or filenames, it is no longer sufficient to load
5878complete.el. Instead you must call the function partial-completion-mode.
5879
5880** If you wish to use uniquify to rename buffers for you,
5881it is no longer sufficient to load uniquify.el. You must also
5882set uniquify-buffer-name-style to one of the non-nil legitimate values.
5883
5884** Changes in View mode.
5885
5886*** Several new commands are available in View mode.
5887Do H in view mode for a list of commands.
5888
5889*** There are two new commands for entering View mode:
5890view-file-other-frame and view-buffer-other-frame.
5891
5892*** Exiting View mode does a better job of restoring windows to their
5893previous state.
5894
5895*** New customization variable view-scroll-auto-exit. If non-nil,
5896scrolling past end of buffer makes view mode exit.
5897
5898*** New customization variable view-exits-all-viewing-windows. If
5899non-nil, view-mode will at exit restore all windows viewing buffer,
5900not just the selected window.
5901
5902*** New customization variable view-read-only. If non-nil, visiting a
5903read-only file automatically enters View mode, and toggle-read-only
5904turns View mode on or off.
5905
5906*** New customization variable view-remove-frame-by-deleting controls
5907how to remove a not needed frame at view mode exit. If non-nil,
5908delete the frame, if nil make an icon of it.
5909
5910** C-x v l, the command to print a file's version control log,
5911now positions point at the entry for the file's current branch version.
5912
5913** C-x v =, the command to compare a file with the last checked-in version,
5914has a new feature. If the file is currently not locked, so that it is
5915presumably identical to the last checked-in version, the command now asks
5916which version to compare with.
5917
5918** When using hideshow.el, incremental search can temporarily show hidden
5919blocks if a match is inside the block.
5920
5921The block is hidden again if the search is continued and the next match
5922is outside the block. By customizing the variable
5923isearch-hide-immediately you can choose to hide all the temporarily
5924shown blocks only when exiting from incremental search.
5925
5926By customizing the variable hs-isearch-open you can choose what kind
5927of blocks to temporarily show during isearch: comment blocks, code
5928blocks, all of them or none.
5929
5930** The new command C-x 4 0 (kill-buffer-and-window) kills the
5931current buffer and deletes the selected window. It asks for
5932confirmation first.
5933
5934** C-x C-w, which saves the buffer into a specified file name,
5935now changes the major mode according to that file name.
5936However, the mode will not be changed if
5937(1) a local variables list or the `-*-' line specifies a major mode, or
5938(2) the current major mode is a "special" mode,
5939 not suitable for ordinary files, or
5940(3) the new file name does not particularly specify any mode.
5941
5942This applies to M-x set-visited-file-name as well.
5943
5944However, if you set change-major-mode-with-file-name to nil, then
5945these commands do not change the major mode.
5946
5947** M-x occur changes.
5948
5949*** If the argument to M-x occur contains upper case letters,
5950it performs a case-sensitive search.
5951
5952*** In the *Occur* buffer made by M-x occur,
5953if you type g or M-x revert-buffer, this repeats the search
5954using the same regular expression and the same buffer as before.
5955
5956** In Transient Mark mode, the region in any one buffer is highlighted
5957in just one window at a time. At first, it is highlighted in the
5958window where you set the mark. The buffer's highlighting remains in
5959that window unless you select to another window which shows the same
5960buffer--then the highlighting moves to that window.
5961
5962** The feature to suggest key bindings when you use M-x now operates
5963after the command finishes. The message suggesting key bindings
5964appears temporarily in the echo area. The previous echo area contents
5965come back after a few seconds, in case they contain useful information.
5966
5967** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
5968selected buffers, so that the default for C-x b is now based on the
5969buffers recently selected in the selected frame.
5970
5971** Outline mode changes.
5972
5973*** Outline mode now uses overlays (this is the former noutline.el).
5974
5975*** Incremental searches skip over invisible text in Outline mode.
5976
5977** When a minibuffer window is active but not the selected window, if
5978you try to use the minibuffer, you used to get a nested minibuffer.
5979Now, this not only gives an error, it also cancels the minibuffer that
5980was already active.
5981
5982The motive for this change is so that beginning users do not
5983unknowingly move away from minibuffers, leaving them active, and then
5984get confused by it.
5985
5986If you want to be able to have recursive minibuffers, you must
5987set enable-recursive-minibuffers to non-nil.
5988
5989** Changes in dynamic abbrevs.
5990
5991*** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
5992conversion. If the expansion has mixed case not counting the first
5993character, and the abbreviation matches the beginning of the expansion
5994including case, then the expansion is copied verbatim.
5995
5996The expansion is also copied verbatim if the abbreviation itself has
5997mixed case. And using SPC M-/ to copy an additional word always
5998copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is all caps.
5999
6000*** The values of `dabbrev-case-replace' and `dabbrev-case-fold-search'
6001are no longer Lisp expressions. They have simply three possible
6002values.
6003
6004`dabbrev-case-replace' has these three values: nil (don't preserve
6005case), t (do), or `case-replace' (do like M-x query-replace).
6006`dabbrev-case-fold-search' has these three values: nil (don't ignore
6007case), t (do), or `case-fold-search' (do like search).
6008
6009** Minibuffer history lists are truncated automatically now to a
6010certain length. The variable history-length specifies how long they
6011can be. The default value is 30.
6012
6013** Changes in Mail mode.
6014
6015*** The key C-x m no longer runs the `mail' command directly.
6016Instead, it runs the command `compose-mail', which invokes the mail
6017composition mechanism you have selected with the variable
6018`mail-user-agent'. The default choice of user agent is
6019`sendmail-user-agent', which gives behavior compatible with the old
6020behavior.
6021
6022C-x 4 m now runs compose-mail-other-window, and C-x 5 m runs
6023compose-mail-other-frame.
6024
6025*** While composing a reply to a mail message, from Rmail, you can use
6026the command C-c C-r to cite just the region from the message you are
6027replying to. This copies the text which is the selected region in the
6028buffer that shows the original message.
6029
6030*** The command C-c C-i inserts a file at the end of the message,
6031with separator lines around the contents.
6032
6033*** The command M-x expand-mail-aliases expands all mail aliases
6034in suitable mail headers. Emacs automatically extracts mail alias
6035definitions from your mail alias file (e.g., ~/.mailrc). You do not
6036need to expand mail aliases yourself before sending mail.
6037
6038*** New features in the mail-complete command.
6039
6040**** The mail-complete command now inserts the user's full name,
6041for local users or if that is known. The variable mail-complete-style
6042controls the style to use, and whether to do this at all.
6043Its values are like those of mail-from-style.
6044
6045**** The variable mail-passwd-command lets you specify a shell command
6046to run to fetch a set of password-entries that add to the ones in
6047/etc/passwd.
6048
6049**** The variable mail-passwd-file now specifies a list of files to read
6050to get the list of user ids. By default, one file is used:
6051/etc/passwd.
6052
6053** You can "quote" a file name to inhibit special significance of
6054special syntax, by adding `/:' to the beginning. Thus, if you have a
6055directory named `/foo:', you can prevent it from being treated as a
6056reference to a remote host named `foo' by writing it as `/:/foo:'.
6057
6058Emacs uses this new construct automatically when necessary, such as
6059when you start it with a working directory whose name might otherwise
6060be taken to be magic.
6061
6062** There is a new command M-x grep-find which uses find to select
6063files to search through, and grep to scan them. The output is
6064available in a Compile mode buffer, as with M-x grep.
6065
6066M-x grep now uses the -e option if the grep program supports that.
6067(-e prevents problems if the search pattern starts with a dash.)
6068
6069** In Dired, the & command now flags for deletion the files whose names
6070suggest they are probably not needed in the long run.
6071
6072In Dired, * is now a prefix key for mark-related commands.
6073
6074new key dired.el binding old key
6075------- ---------------- -------
6076 * c dired-change-marks c
6077 * m dired-mark m
6078 * * dired-mark-executables * (binding deleted)
6079 * / dired-mark-directories / (binding deleted)
6080 * @ dired-mark-symlinks @ (binding deleted)
6081 * u dired-unmark u
6082 * DEL dired-unmark-backward DEL
6083 * ? dired-unmark-all-files M-C-?
6084 * ! dired-unmark-all-marks
6085 * % dired-mark-files-regexp % m
6086 * C-n dired-next-marked-file M-}
6087 * C-p dired-prev-marked-file M-{
6088
6089** Rmail changes.
6090
6091*** When Rmail cannot convert your incoming mail into Babyl format, it
6092saves the new mail in the file RMAILOSE.n, where n is an integer
6093chosen to make a unique name. This way, Rmail will not keep crashing
6094each time you run it.
6095
6096*** In Rmail, the variable rmail-summary-line-count-flag now controls
6097whether to include the line count in the summary. Non-nil means yes.
6098
6099*** In Rmail summary buffers, d and C-d (the commands to delete
6100messages) now take repeat counts as arguments. A negative argument
6101means to move in the opposite direction.
6102
6103*** In Rmail, the t command now takes an optional argument which lets
6104you specify whether to show the message headers in full or pruned.
6105
6106*** In Rmail, the new command w (rmail-output-body-to-file) writes
6107just the body of the current message into a file, without the headers.
6108It takes the file name from the message subject, by default, but you
6109can edit that file name in the minibuffer before it is actually used
6110for output.
6111
6112** Gnus changes.
6113
6114*** nntp.el has been totally rewritten in an asynchronous fashion.
6115
6116*** Article prefetching functionality has been moved up into
6117Gnus.
6118
6119*** Scoring can now be performed with logical operators like
6120`and', `or', `not', and parent redirection.
6121
6122*** Article washing status can be displayed in the
6123article mode line.
6124
6125*** gnus.el has been split into many smaller files.
6126
6127*** Suppression of duplicate articles based on Message-ID.
6128
6129(setq gnus-suppress-duplicates t)
6130
6131*** New variables for specifying what score and adapt files
6132are to be considered home score and adapt files. See
6133`gnus-home-score-file' and `gnus-home-adapt-files'.
6134
6135*** Groups can inherit group parameters from parent topics.
6136
6137*** Article editing has been revamped and is now usable.
6138
6139*** Signatures can be recognized in more intelligent fashions.
6140See `gnus-signature-separator' and `gnus-signature-limit'.
6141
6142*** Summary pick mode has been made to look more nn-like.
6143Line numbers are displayed and the `.' command can be
6144used to pick articles.
6145
6146*** Commands for moving the .newsrc.eld from one server to
6147another have been added.
6148
6149 `M-x gnus-change-server'
6150
6151*** A way to specify that "uninteresting" fields be suppressed when
6152generating lines in buffers.
6153
6154*** Several commands in the group buffer can be undone with
6155`M-C-_'.
6156
6157*** Scoring can be done on words using the new score type `w'.
6158
6159*** Adaptive scoring can be done on a Subject word-by-word basis:
6160
6161 (setq gnus-use-adaptive-scoring '(word))
6162
6163*** Scores can be decayed.
6164
6165 (setq gnus-decay-scores t)
6166
6167*** Scoring can be performed using a regexp on the Date header. The
6168Date is normalized to compact ISO 8601 format first.
6169
6170*** A new command has been added to remove all data on articles from
6171the native server.
6172
6173 `M-x gnus-group-clear-data-on-native-groups'
6174
6175*** A new command for reading collections of documents
6176(nndoc with nnvirtual on top) has been added -- `M-C-d'.
6177
6178*** Process mark sets can be pushed and popped.
6179
6180*** A new mail-to-news backend makes it possible to post
6181even when the NNTP server doesn't allow posting.
6182
6183*** A new backend for reading searches from Web search engines
6184(DejaNews, Alta Vista, InReference) has been added.
6185
6186 Use the `G w' command in the group buffer to create such
6187 a group.
6188
6189*** Groups inside topics can now be sorted using the standard
6190sorting functions, and each topic can be sorted independently.
6191
6192 See the commands under the `T S' submap.
6193
6194*** Subsets of the groups can be sorted independently.
6195
6196 See the commands under the `G P' submap.
6197
6198*** Cached articles can be pulled into the groups.
6199
6200 Use the `Y c' command.
6201
6202*** Score files are now applied in a more reliable order.
6203
6204*** Reports on where mail messages end up can be generated.
6205
6206 `M-x nnmail-split-history'
6207
6208*** More hooks and functions have been added to remove junk
6209from incoming mail before saving the mail.
6210
6211 See `nnmail-prepare-incoming-header-hook'.
6212
6213*** The nnml mail backend now understands compressed article files.
6214
6215*** To enable Gnus to read/post multi-lingual articles, you must execute
6216the following code, for instance, in your .emacs.
6217
6218 (add-hook 'gnus-startup-hook 'gnus-mule-initialize)
6219
6220Then, when you start Gnus, it will decode non-ASCII text automatically
6221and show appropriate characters. (Note: if you are using gnus-mime
6222from the SEMI package, formerly known as TM, you should NOT add this
6223hook to gnus-startup-hook; gnus-mime has its own method of handling
6224this issue.)
6225
6226Since it is impossible to distinguish all coding systems
6227automatically, you may need to specify a choice of coding system for a
6228particular news group. This can be done by:
6229
6230 (gnus-mule-add-group NEWSGROUP 'CODING-SYSTEM)
6231
6232Here NEWSGROUP should be a string which names a newsgroup or a tree
6233of newsgroups. If NEWSGROUP is "XXX.YYY", all news groups under
6234"XXX.YYY" (including "XXX.YYY.ZZZ") will use the specified coding
6235system. CODING-SYSTEM specifies which coding system to use (for both
6236for reading and posting).
6237
6238CODING-SYSTEM can also be a cons cell of the form
6239 (READ-CODING-SYSTEM . POST-CODING-SYSTEM)
6240Then READ-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you read messages from the
6241newsgroups, while POST-CODING-SYSTEM is used when you post messages
6242there.
6243
6244Emacs knows the right coding systems for certain newsgroups by
6245default. Here are some of these default settings:
6246
6247 (gnus-mule-add-group "fj" 'iso-2022-7)
6248 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text" 'hz-gb-2312)
6249 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.hk" 'hz-gb-2312)
6250 (gnus-mule-add-group "alt.chinese.text.big5" 'cn-big5)
6251 (gnus-mule-add-group "soc.culture.vietnamese" '(nil . viqr))
6252
6253When you reply by mail to an article, these settings are ignored;
6254the mail is encoded according to sendmail-coding-system, as usual.
6255
6256** CC mode changes.
6257
6258*** If you edit primarily one style of C (or C++, Objective-C, Java)
6259code, you may want to make the CC Mode style variables have global
6260values so that you can set them directly in your .emacs file. To do
6261this, set c-style-variables-are-local-p to nil in your .emacs file.
6262Note that this only takes effect if you do it *before* cc-mode.el is
6263loaded.
6264
6265If you typically edit more than one style of C (or C++, Objective-C,
6266Java) code in a single Emacs session, you may want to make the CC Mode
6267style variables have buffer local values. By default, all buffers
6268share the same style variable settings; to make them buffer local, set
6269c-style-variables-are-local-p to t in your .emacs file. Note that you
6270must do this *before* CC Mode is loaded.
6271
6272*** The new variable c-indentation-style holds the C style name
6273of the current buffer.
6274
6275*** The variable c-block-comments-indent-p has been deleted, because
6276it is no longer necessary. C mode now handles all the supported styles
6277of block comments, with no need to say which one you will use.
6278
6279*** There is a new indentation style "python", which specifies the C
6280style that the Python developers like.
6281
6282*** There is a new c-cleanup-list option: brace-elseif-brace.
6283This says to put ...} else if (...) {... on one line,
6284just as brace-else-brace says to put ...} else {... on one line.
6285
6286** VC Changes [new]
6287
6288** In vc-retrieve-snapshot (C-x v r), if you don't specify a snapshot
6289name, it retrieves the *latest* versions of all files in the current
6290directory and its subdirectories (aside from files already locked).
6291
6292This feature is useful if your RCS directory is a link to a common
6293master directory, and you want to pick up changes made by other
6294developers.
6295
6296You can do the same thing for an individual file by typing C-u C-x C-q
6297RET in a buffer visiting that file.
6298
6299*** VC can now handle files under CVS that are being "watched" by
6300other developers. Such files are made read-only by CVS. To get a
6301writable copy, type C-x C-q in a buffer visiting such a file. VC then
6302calls "cvs edit", which notifies the other developers of it.
6303
6304*** vc-version-diff (C-u C-x v =) now suggests reasonable defaults for
6305version numbers, based on the current state of the file.
6306
6307** Calendar changes.
6308
6309A new function, list-holidays, allows you list holidays or subclasses
6310of holidays for ranges of years. Related menu items allow you do this
6311for the year of the selected date, or the following/previous years.
6312
6313** ps-print changes
6314
6315There are some new user variables for customizing the page layout.
6316
6317*** Paper size, paper orientation, columns
6318
6319The variable `ps-paper-type' determines the size of paper ps-print
6320formats for; it should contain one of the symbols:
6321`a4' `a3' `letter' `legal' `letter-small' `tabloid'
6322`ledger' `statement' `executive' `a4small' `b4' `b5'
6323It defaults to `letter'.
6324If you need other sizes, see the variable `ps-page-dimensions-database'.
6325
6326The variable `ps-landscape-mode' determines the orientation
6327of the printing on the page. nil, the default, means "portrait" mode,
6328non-nil means "landscape" mode.
6329
6330The variable `ps-number-of-columns' must be a positive integer.
6331It determines the number of columns both in landscape and portrait mode.
6332It defaults to 1.
6333
6334*** Horizontal layout
6335
6336The horizontal layout is determined by the variables
6337`ps-left-margin', `ps-inter-column', and `ps-right-margin'.
6338All are measured in points.
6339
6340*** Vertical layout
6341
6342The vertical layout is determined by the variables
6343`ps-bottom-margin', `ps-top-margin', and `ps-header-offset'.
6344All are measured in points.
6345
6346*** Headers
6347
6348If the variable `ps-print-header' is nil, no header is printed. Then
6349`ps-header-offset' is not relevant and `ps-top-margin' represents the
6350margin above the text.
6351
6352If the variable `ps-print-header-frame' is non-nil, a gaudy
6353framing box is printed around the header.
6354
6355The contents of the header are determined by `ps-header-lines',
6356`ps-show-n-of-n', `ps-left-header' and `ps-right-header'.
6357
6358The height of the header is determined by `ps-header-line-pad',
6359`ps-header-font-family', `ps-header-title-font-size' and
6360`ps-header-font-size'.
6361
6362*** Font managing
6363
6364The variable `ps-font-family' determines which font family is to be
6365used for ordinary text. Its value must be a key symbol in the alist
6366`ps-font-info-database'. You can add other font families by adding
6367elements to this alist.
6368
6369The variable `ps-font-size' determines the size of the font
6370for ordinary text. It defaults to 8.5 points.
6371
6372** hideshow changes.
6373
6374*** now supports hiding of blocks of single line comments (like // for
6375C++, ; for lisp).
6376
6377*** Support for java-mode added.
6378
6379*** When doing `hs-hide-all' it is now possible to also hide the comments
6380in the file if `hs-hide-comments-when-hiding-all' is set.
6381
6382*** The new function `hs-hide-initial-comment' hides the the comments at
6383the beginning of the files. Finally those huge RCS logs don't stay in your
6384way! This is run by default when entering the `hs-minor-mode'.
6385
6386*** Now uses overlays instead of `selective-display', so is more
6387robust and a lot faster.
6388
6389*** A block beginning can span multiple lines.
6390
6391*** The new variable `hs-show-hidden-short-form' if t, directs hideshow
6392to show only the beginning of a block when it is hidden. See the
6393documentation for more details.
6394
6395** Changes in Enriched mode.
6396
6397*** When you visit a file in enriched-mode, Emacs will make sure it is
6398filled to the current fill-column. This behavior is now independent
6399of the size of the window. When you save the file, the fill-column in
6400use is stored as well, so that the whole buffer need not be refilled
6401the next time unless the fill-column is different.
6402
6403*** use-hard-newlines is now a minor mode. When it is enabled, Emacs
6404distinguishes between hard and soft newlines, and treats hard newlines
6405as paragraph boundaries. Otherwise all newlines inserted are marked
6406as soft, and paragraph boundaries are determined solely from the text.
6407
6408** Font Lock mode
6409
6410*** Custom support
6411
6412The variables font-lock-face-attributes, font-lock-display-type and
6413font-lock-background-mode are now obsolete; the recommended way to specify the
6414faces to use for Font Lock mode is with M-x customize-group on the new custom
6415group font-lock-highlighting-faces. If you set font-lock-face-attributes in
6416your ~/.emacs file, Font Lock mode will respect its value. However, you should
6417consider converting from setting that variable to using M-x customize.
6418
6419You can still use X resources to specify Font Lock face appearances.
6420
6421*** Maximum decoration
6422
6423Fontification now uses the maximum level of decoration supported by
6424default. Previously, fontification used a mode-specific default level
6425of decoration, which is typically the minimum level of decoration
6426supported. You can set font-lock-maximum-decoration to nil
6427to get the old behavior.
6428
6429*** New support
6430
6431Support is now provided for Java, Objective-C, AWK and SIMULA modes.
6432
6433Note that Font Lock mode can be turned on without knowing exactly what modes
6434support Font Lock mode, via the command global-font-lock-mode.
6435
6436*** Configurable support
6437
6438Support for C, C++, Objective-C and Java can be more easily configured for
6439additional types and classes via the new variables c-font-lock-extra-types,
6440c++-font-lock-extra-types, objc-font-lock-extra-types and, you guessed it,
6441java-font-lock-extra-types. These value of each of these variables should be a
6442list of regexps matching the extra type names. For example, the default value
6443of c-font-lock-extra-types is ("\\sw+_t") which means fontification follows the
6444convention that C type names end in _t. This results in slower fontification.
6445
6446Of course, you can change the variables that specify fontification in whatever
6447way you wish, typically by adding regexps. However, these new variables make
6448it easier to make specific and common changes for the fontification of types.
6449
6450*** Adding highlighting patterns to existing support
6451
6452You can use the new function font-lock-add-keywords to add your own
6453highlighting patterns, such as for project-local or user-specific constructs,
6454for any mode.
6455
6456For example, to highlight `FIXME:' words in C comments, put:
6457
6458 (font-lock-add-keywords 'c-mode '(("\\<FIXME:" 0 font-lock-warning-face t)))
6459
6460in your ~/.emacs.
6461
6462*** New faces
6463
6464Font Lock now defines two new faces, font-lock-builtin-face and
6465font-lock-warning-face. These are intended to highlight builtin keywords,
6466distinct from a language's normal keywords, and objects that should be brought
6467to user attention, respectively. Various modes now use these new faces.
6468
6469*** Changes to fast-lock support mode
6470
6471The fast-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now process
6472cache files silently. You can use the new variable fast-lock-verbose, in the
6473same way as font-lock-verbose, to control this feature.
6474
6475*** Changes to lazy-lock support mode
6476
6477The lazy-lock package, one of the two Font Lock support modes, can now fontify
6478according to the true syntactic context relative to other lines. You can use
6479the new variable lazy-lock-defer-contextually to control this feature. If
6480non-nil, changes to the buffer will cause subsequent lines in the buffer to be
6481refontified after lazy-lock-defer-time seconds of idle time. If nil, then only
6482the modified lines will be refontified; this is the same as the previous Lazy
6483Lock mode behaviour and the behaviour of Font Lock mode.
6484
6485This feature is useful in modes where strings or comments can span lines.
6486For example, if a string or comment terminating character is deleted, then if
6487this feature is enabled subsequent lines in the buffer will be correctly
6488refontified to reflect their new syntactic context. Previously, only the line
6489containing the deleted character would be refontified and you would have to use
6490the command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block) to refontify some lines.
6491
6492As a consequence of this new feature, two other variables have changed:
6493
6494Variable `lazy-lock-defer-driven' is renamed `lazy-lock-defer-on-scrolling'.
6495Variable `lazy-lock-defer-time' can now only be a time, i.e., a number.
6496Buffer modes for which on-the-fly deferral applies can be specified via the
6497new variable `lazy-lock-defer-on-the-fly'.
6498
6499If you set these variables in your ~/.emacs, then you may have to change those
6500settings.
6501
6502** Ada mode changes.
6503
6504*** There is now better support for using find-file.el with Ada mode.
6505If you switch between spec and body, the cursor stays in the same
6506procedure (modulo overloading). If a spec has no body file yet, but
6507you try to switch to its body file, Ada mode now generates procedure
6508stubs.
6509
6510*** There are two new commands:
6511 - `ada-make-local' : invokes gnatmake on the current buffer
6512 - `ada-check-syntax' : check syntax of current buffer.
6513
6514The user options `ada-compiler-make', `ada-make-options',
6515`ada-language-version', `ada-compiler-syntax-check', and
6516`ada-compile-options' are used within these commands.
6517
6518*** Ada mode can now work with Outline minor mode. The outline level
6519is calculated from the indenting, not from syntactic constructs.
6520Outlining does not work if your code is not correctly indented.
6521
6522*** The new function `ada-gnat-style' converts the buffer to the style of
6523formatting used in GNAT. It places two blanks after a comment start,
6524places one blank between a word end and an opening '(', and puts one
6525space between a comma and the beginning of a word.
6526
6527** Scheme mode changes.
6528
6529*** Scheme mode indentation now uses many of the facilities of Lisp
6530mode; therefore, the variables to customize it are the variables used
6531for Lisp mode which have names starting with `lisp-'. The variables
6532with names starting with `scheme-' which used to do this no longer
6533have any effect.
6534
6535If you want to use different indentation for Scheme and Lisp, this is
6536still possible, but now you must do it by adding a hook to
6537scheme-mode-hook, which could work by setting the `lisp-' indentation
6538variables as buffer-local variables.
6539
6540*** DSSSL mode is a variant of Scheme mode, for editing DSSSL scripts.
6541Use M-x dsssl-mode.
6542
6543** Changes to the emacsclient program
6544
6545*** If a socket can't be found, and environment variables LOGNAME or
6546USER are set, emacsclient now looks for a socket based on the UID
6547associated with the name. That is an emacsclient running as root
6548can connect to an Emacs server started by a non-root user.
6549
6550*** The emacsclient program now accepts an option --no-wait which tells
6551it to return immediately without waiting for you to "finish" the
6552buffer in Emacs.
6553
6554*** The new option --alternate-editor allows to specify an editor to
6555use if Emacs is not running. The environment variable
6556ALTERNATE_EDITOR can be used for the same effect; the command line
6557option takes precedence.
6558
6559** M-x eldoc-mode enables a minor mode in which the echo area
6560constantly shows the parameter list for function being called at point
6561(in Emacs Lisp and Lisp Interaction modes only).
6562
6563** C-x n d now runs the new command narrow-to-defun,
6564which narrows the accessible parts of the buffer to just
6565the current defun.
6566
6567** Emacs now handles the `--' argument in the standard way; all
6568following arguments are treated as ordinary file names.
6569
6570** On MSDOS and Windows, the bookmark file is now called _emacs.bmk,
6571and the saved desktop file is now called _emacs.desktop (truncated if
6572necessary).
6573
6574** When you kill a buffer that visits a file,
6575if there are any registers that save positions in the file,
6576these register values no longer become completely useless.
6577If you try to go to such a register with C-x j, then you are
6578asked whether to visit the file again. If you say yes,
6579it visits the file and then goes to the same position.
6580
6581** When you visit a file that changes frequently outside Emacs--for
6582example, a log of output from a process that continues to run--it may
6583be useful for Emacs to revert the file without querying you whenever
6584you visit the file afresh with C-x C-f.
6585
6586You can request this behavior for certain files by setting the
6587variable revert-without-query to a list of regular expressions. If a
6588file's name matches any of these regular expressions, find-file and
6589revert-buffer revert the buffer without asking for permission--but
6590only if you have not edited the buffer text yourself.
6591
6592** set-default-font has been renamed to set-frame-font
6593since it applies only to the current frame.
6594
6595** In TeX mode, you can use the variable tex-main-file to specify the
6596file for tex-file to run TeX on. (By default, tex-main-file is nil,
6597and tex-file runs TeX on the current visited file.)
6598
6599This is useful when you are editing a document that consists of
6600multiple files. In each of the included files, you can set up a local
6601variable list which specifies the top-level file of your document for
6602tex-main-file. Then tex-file will run TeX on the whole document
6603instead of just the file you are editing.
6604
6605** RefTeX mode
6606
6607RefTeX mode is a new minor mode with special support for \label, \ref
6608and \cite macros in LaTeX documents. RefTeX distinguishes labels of
6609different environments (equation, figure, ...) and has full support for
6610multifile documents. To use it, select a buffer with a LaTeX document and
6611turn the mode on with M-x reftex-mode. Here are the main user commands:
6612
6613C-c ( reftex-label
6614 Creates a label semi-automatically. RefTeX is context sensitive and
6615 knows which kind of label is needed.
6616
6617C-c ) reftex-reference
6618 Offers in a menu all labels in the document, along with context of the
6619 label definition. The selected label is referenced as \ref{LABEL}.
6620
6621C-c [ reftex-citation
6622 Prompts for a regular expression and displays a list of matching BibTeX
6623 database entries. The selected entry is cited with a \cite{KEY} macro.
6624
6625C-c & reftex-view-crossref
6626 Views the cross reference of a \ref or \cite command near point.
6627
6628C-c = reftex-toc
6629 Shows a table of contents of the (multifile) document. From there you
6630 can quickly jump to every section.
6631
6632Under X, RefTeX installs a "Ref" menu in the menu bar, with additional
6633commands. Press `?' to get help when a prompt mentions this feature.
6634Full documentation and customization examples are in the file
6635reftex.el. You can use the finder to view the file documentation:
6636C-h p --> tex --> reftex.el
6637
6638** Changes in BibTeX mode.
6639
6640*** Info documentation is now available.
6641
6642*** Don't allow parentheses in string constants anymore. This confused
6643both the BibTeX program and Emacs BibTeX mode.
6644
6645*** Renamed variable bibtex-mode-user-optional-fields to
6646bibtex-user-optional-fields.
6647
6648*** Removed variable bibtex-include-OPTannote
6649(use bibtex-user-optional-fields instead).
6650
6651*** New interactive functions to copy and kill fields and complete
6652entries to the BibTeX kill ring, from where they can be yanked back by
6653appropriate functions.
6654
6655*** New interactive functions for repositioning and marking of
6656entries. They are bound by default to M-C-l and M-C-h.
6657
6658*** New hook bibtex-clean-entry-hook. It is called after entry has
6659been cleaned.
6660
6661*** New variable bibtex-field-delimiters, which replaces variables
6662bibtex-field-{left|right}-delimiter.
6663
6664*** New variable bibtex-entry-delimiters to determine how entries
6665shall be delimited.
6666
6667*** Allow preinitialization of fields. See documentation of
6668bibtex-user-optional-fields, bibtex-entry-field-alist, and
6669bibtex-include-OPTkey for details.
6670
6671*** Book and InBook entries require either an author or an editor
6672field. This is now supported by bibtex.el. Alternative fields are
6673prefixed with `ALT'.
6674
6675*** New variable bibtex-entry-format, which replaces variable
6676bibtex-clean-entry-zap-empty-opts and allows specification of many
6677formatting options performed on cleaning an entry (see variable
6678documentation).
6679
6680*** Even more control on how automatic keys are generated. See
6681documentation of bibtex-generate-autokey for details. Transcriptions
6682for foreign languages other than German are now handled, too.
6683
6684*** New boolean user option bibtex-comma-after-last-field to decide if
6685comma should be inserted at end of last field.
6686
6687*** New boolean user option bibtex-align-at-equal-sign to determine if
6688alignment should be made at left side of field contents or at equal
6689signs. New user options to control entry layout (e.g. indentation).
6690
6691*** New function bibtex-fill-entry to realign entries.
6692
6693*** New function bibtex-reformat to reformat region or buffer.
6694
6695*** New function bibtex-convert-alien to convert a BibTeX database
6696from alien sources.
6697
6698*** New function bibtex-complete-key (similar to bibtex-complete-string)
6699to complete prefix to a key defined in buffer. Mainly useful in
6700crossref entries.
6701
6702*** New function bibtex-count-entries to count entries in buffer or
6703region.
6704
6705*** Added support for imenu.
6706
6707*** The function `bibtex-validate' now checks current region instead
6708of buffer if mark is active. Now it shows all errors of buffer in a
6709`compilation mode' buffer. You can use the normal commands (e.g.
6710`next-error') for compilation modes to jump to errors.
6711
6712*** New variable `bibtex-string-file-path' to determine where the files
6713from `bibtex-string-files' are searched.
6714
6715** Iso Accents mode now supports Latin-3 as an alternative.
6716
6717** The command next-error now opens blocks hidden by hideshow.
6718
6719** The function using-unix-filesystems has been replaced by the
6720functions add-untranslated-filesystem and remove-untranslated-filesystem.
6721Each of these functions takes the name of a drive letter or directory
6722as an argument.
6723
6724When a filesystem is added as untranslated, all files on it are read
6725and written in binary mode (no cr/lf translation is performed).
6726
6727** browse-url changes
6728
6729*** New methods for: Grail (browse-url-generic), MMM (browse-url-mmm),
6730Lynx in a separate xterm (browse-url-lynx-xterm) or in an Emacs window
6731(browse-url-lynx-emacs), remote W3 (browse-url-w3-gnudoit), generic
6732non-remote-controlled browsers (browse-url-generic) and associated
6733customization variables.
6734
6735*** New commands `browse-url-of-region' and `browse-url'.
6736
6737*** URLs marked up with <URL:...> (RFC1738) work if broken across
6738lines. Browsing methods can be associated with URL regexps
6739(e.g. mailto: URLs) via `browse-url-browser-function'.
6740
6741** Changes in Ediff
6742
6743*** Clicking Mouse-2 on a brief command description in Ediff control panel
6744pops up the Info file for this command.
6745
6746*** There is now a variable, ediff-autostore-merges, which controls whether
6747the result of a merge is saved in a file. By default, this is done only when
6748merge is done from a session group (eg, when merging files in two different
6749directories).
6750
6751*** Since Emacs 19.31 (this hasn't been announced before), Ediff can compare
6752and merge groups of files residing in different directories, or revisions of
6753files in the same directory.
6754
6755*** Since Emacs 19.31, Ediff can apply multi-file patches interactively.
6756The patches must be in the context format or GNU unified format. (The bug
6757related to the GNU format has now been fixed.)
6758
6759** Changes in Viper
6760
6761*** The startup file is now .viper instead of .vip
6762*** All variable/function names have been changed to start with viper-
6763 instead of vip-.
6764*** C-\ now simulates the meta-key in all Viper states.
6765*** C-z in Insert state now escapes to Vi for the duration of the next
6766Viper command. In Vi and Insert states, C-z behaves as before.
6767*** C-c \ escapes to Vi for one command if Viper is in Insert or Emacs states.
6768*** _ is no longer the meta-key in Vi state.
6769*** The variable viper-insert-state-cursor-color can be used to change cursor
6770color when Viper is in insert state.
6771*** If search lands the cursor near the top or the bottom of the window,
6772Viper pulls the window up or down to expose more context. The variable
6773viper-adjust-window-after-search controls this behavior.
6774
6775** Etags changes.
6776
6777*** In C, C++, Objective C and Java, Etags tags global variables by
6778default. The resulting tags files are inflated by 30% on average.
6779Use --no-globals to turn this feature off. Etags can also tag
6780variables which are members of structure-like constructs, but it does
6781not by default. Use --members to turn this feature on.
6782
6783*** C++ member functions are now recognized as tags.
6784
6785*** Java is tagged like C++. In addition, "extends" and "implements"
6786constructs are tagged. Files are recognised by the extension .java.
6787
6788*** Etags can now handle programs written in Postscript. Files are
6789recognised by the extensions .ps and .pdb (Postscript with C syntax).
6790In Postscript, tags are lines that start with a slash.
6791
6792*** Etags now handles Objective C and Objective C++ code. The usual C and
6793C++ tags are recognized in these languages; in addition, etags
6794recognizes special Objective C syntax for classes, class categories,
6795methods and protocols.
6796
6797*** Etags also handles Cobol. Files are recognised by the extension
6798.cobol. The tagged lines are those containing a word that begins in
6799column 8 and ends in a full stop, i.e. anything that could be a
6800paragraph name.
6801
6802*** Regexps in Etags now support intervals, as in ed or grep. The syntax of
6803an interval is \{M,N\}, and it means to match the preceding expression
6804at least M times and as many as N times.
6805
6806** The format for specifying a custom format for time-stamp to insert
6807in files has changed slightly.
6808
6809With the new enhancements to the functionality of format-time-string,
6810time-stamp-format will change to be eventually compatible with it.
6811This conversion is being done in two steps to maintain compatibility
6812with old time-stamp-format values.
6813
6814In the new scheme, alternate case is signified by the number-sign
6815(`#') modifier, rather than changing the case of the format character.
6816This feature is as yet incompletely implemented for compatibility
6817reasons.
6818
6819In the old time-stamp-format, all numeric fields defaulted to their
6820natural width. (With format-time-string, each format has a
6821fixed-width default.) In this version, you can specify the colon
6822(`:') modifier to a numeric conversion to mean "give me the historical
6823time-stamp-format width default." Do not use colon if you are
6824specifying an explicit width, as in "%02d".
6825
6826Numbers are no longer truncated to the requested width, except in the
6827case of "%02y", which continues to give a two-digit year. Digit
6828truncation probably wasn't being used for anything else anyway.
6829
6830The new formats will work with old versions of Emacs. New formats are
6831being recommended now to allow time-stamp-format to change in the
6832future to be compatible with format-time-string. The new forms being
6833recommended now will continue to work then.
6834
6835See the documentation string for the variable time-stamp-format for
6836details.
6837
6838** There are some additional major modes:
6839
6840dcl-mode, for editing VMS DCL files.
6841m4-mode, for editing files of m4 input.
6842meta-mode, for editing MetaFont and MetaPost source files.
6843
6844** In Shell mode, the command shell-copy-environment-variable lets you
6845copy the value of a specified environment variable from the subshell
6846into Emacs.
6847
6848** New Lisp packages include:
6849
6850*** battery.el displays battery status for laptops.
6851
6852*** M-x bruce (named after Lenny Bruce) is a program that might
6853be used for adding some indecent words to your email.
6854
6855*** M-x crisp-mode enables an emulation for the CRiSP editor.
6856
6857*** M-x dirtrack arranges for better tracking of directory changes
6858in shell buffers.
6859
6860*** The new library elint.el provides for linting of Emacs Lisp code.
6861See the documentation for `elint-initialize', `elint-current-buffer'
6862and `elint-defun'.
6863
6864*** M-x expand-add-abbrevs defines a special kind of abbrev which is
6865meant for programming constructs. These abbrevs expand like ordinary
6866ones, when you type SPC, but only at the end of a line and not within
6867strings or comments.
6868
6869These abbrevs can act as templates: you can define places within an
6870abbrev for insertion of additional text. Once you expand the abbrev,
6871you can then use C-x a p and C-x a n to move back and forth to these
6872insertion points. Thus you can conveniently insert additional text
6873at these points.
6874
6875*** filecache.el remembers the location of files so that you
6876can visit them by short forms of their names.
6877
6878*** find-func.el lets you find the definition of the user-loaded
6879Emacs Lisp function at point.
6880
6881*** M-x handwrite converts text to a "handwritten" picture.
6882
6883*** M-x iswitchb-buffer is a command for switching to a buffer, much like
6884switch-buffer, but it reads the argument in a more helpful way.
6885
6886*** M-x landmark implements a neural network for landmark learning.
6887
6888*** M-x locate provides a convenient interface to the `locate' program.
6889
6890*** M4 mode is a new mode for editing files of m4 input.
6891
6892*** mantemp.el creates C++ manual template instantiations
6893from the GCC error messages which indicate which instantiations are needed.
6894
6895*** mouse-copy.el provides a one-click copy and move feature.
6896You can drag a region with M-mouse-1, and it is automatically
6897inserted at point. M-Shift-mouse-1 deletes the text from its
6898original place after inserting the copy.
6899
6900*** mouse-drag.el lets you do scrolling by dragging Mouse-2
6901on the buffer.
6902
6903You click the mouse and move; that distance either translates into the
6904velocity to scroll (with mouse-drag-throw) or the distance to scroll
6905(with mouse-drag-drag). Horizontal scrolling is enabled when needed.
6906
6907Enable mouse-drag with:
6908 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-throw)
6909-or-
6910 (global-set-key [down-mouse-2] 'mouse-drag-drag)
6911
6912*** mspools.el is useful for determining which mail folders have
6913mail waiting to be read in them. It works with procmail.
6914
6915*** Octave mode is a major mode for editing files of input for Octave.
6916It comes with a facility for communicating with an Octave subprocess.
6917
6918*** ogonek
6919
6920The ogonek package provides functions for changing the coding of
6921Polish diacritic characters in buffers. Codings known from various
6922platforms are supported such as ISO8859-2, Mazovia, IBM Latin2, and
6923TeX. For example, you can change the coding from Mazovia to
6924ISO8859-2. Another example is a change of coding from ISO8859-2 to
6925prefix notation (in which `/a' stands for the aogonek character, for
6926instance) and vice versa.
6927
6928To use this package load it using
6929 M-x load-library [enter] ogonek
6930Then, you may get an explanation by calling one of
6931 M-x ogonek-jak -- in Polish
6932 M-x ogonek-how -- in English
6933The info specifies the commands and variables provided as well as the
6934ways of customization in `.emacs'.
6935
6936*** Interface to ph.
6937
6938Emacs provides a client interface to CCSO Nameservers (ph/qi)
6939
6940The CCSO nameserver is used in many universities to provide directory
6941services about people. ph.el provides a convenient Emacs interface to
6942these servers.
6943
6944*** uce.el is useful for replying to unsolicited commercial email.
6945
6946*** vcursor.el implements a "virtual cursor" feature.
6947You can move the virtual cursor with special commands
6948while the real cursor does not move.
6949
6950*** webjump.el is a "hot list" package which you can set up
6951for visiting your favorite web sites.
6952
6953*** M-x winner-mode is a minor mode which saves window configurations,
6954so you can move back to other configurations that you have recently used.
6955
6956** movemail change
6957
6958Movemail no longer needs to be installed setuid root in order for POP
6959mail retrieval to function properly. This is because it no longer
6960supports the RPOP (reserved-port POP) protocol; instead, it uses the
6961user's POP password to authenticate to the mail server.
6962
6963This change was made earlier, but not reported in NEWS before.
6964\f
6965* Emacs 20.1 changes for MS-DOS and MS-Windows.
6966
6967** Changes in handling MS-DOS/MS-Windows text files.
6968
6969Emacs handles three different conventions for representing
6970end-of-line: CRLF for MSDOS, LF for Unix and GNU, and CR (used on the
6971Macintosh). Emacs determines which convention is used in a specific
6972file based on the contents of that file (except for certain special
6973file names), and when it saves the file, it uses the same convention.
6974
6975To save the file and change the end-of-line convention, you can use
6976C-x RET f (set-buffer-file-coding-system) to specify a different
6977coding system for the buffer. Then, when you save the file, the newly
6978specified coding system will take effect. For example, to save with
6979LF, specify undecided-unix (or some other ...-unix coding system); to
6980save with CRLF, specify undecided-dos.
6981\f
6982* Lisp Changes in Emacs 20.1
6983
6984** Byte-compiled files made with Emacs 20 will, in general, work in
6985Emacs 19 as well, as long as the source code runs in Emacs 19. And
6986vice versa: byte-compiled files made with Emacs 19 should also run in
6987Emacs 20, as long as the program itself works in Emacs 20.
6988
6989** Windows-specific functions and variables have been renamed
6990to start with w32- instead of win32-.
6991
6992In hacker language, calling something a "win" is a form of praise. We
6993don't want to praise a non-free Microsoft system, so we don't call it
6994"win".
6995
6996** Basic Lisp changes
6997
6998*** A symbol whose name starts with a colon now automatically
6999evaluates to itself. Therefore such a symbol can be used as a constant.
7000
7001*** The defined purpose of `defconst' has been changed. It should now
7002be used only for values that should not be changed whether by a program
7003or by the user.
7004
7005The actual behavior of defconst has not been changed.
7006
7007*** There are new macros `when' and `unless'
7008
7009(when CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION (progn BODY...))
7010(unless CONDITION BODY...) is short for (if CONDITION nil BODY...)
7011
7012*** Emacs now defines functions caar, cadr, cdar and cddr with their
7013usual Lisp meanings. For example, caar returns the car of the car of
7014its argument.
7015
7016*** equal, when comparing strings, now ignores their text properties.
7017
7018*** The new function `functionp' tests whether an object is a function.
7019
7020*** arrayp now returns t for char-tables and bool-vectors.
7021
7022*** Certain primitives which use characters (as integers) now get an
7023error if the integer is not a valid character code. These primitives
7024include insert-char, char-to-string, and the %c construct in the
7025`format' function.
7026
7027*** The `require' function now insists on adding a suffix, either .el
7028or .elc, to the file name. Thus, (require 'foo) will not use a file
7029whose name is just foo. It insists on foo.el or foo.elc.
7030
7031*** The `autoload' function, when the file name does not contain
7032either a directory name or the suffix .el or .elc, insists on
7033adding one of these suffixes.
7034
7035*** string-to-number now takes an optional second argument BASE
7036which specifies the base to use when converting an integer.
7037If BASE is omitted, base 10 is used.
7038
7039We have not implemented other radices for floating point numbers,
7040because that would be much more work and does not seem useful.
7041
7042*** substring now handles vectors as well as strings.
7043
7044*** The Common Lisp function eql is no longer defined normally.
7045You must load the `cl' library to define it.
7046
7047*** The new macro `with-current-buffer' lets you evaluate an expression
7048conveniently with a different current buffer. It looks like this:
7049
7050 (with-current-buffer BUFFER BODY-FORMS...)
7051
7052BUFFER is the expression that says which buffer to use.
7053BODY-FORMS say what to do in that buffer.
7054
7055*** The new primitive `save-current-buffer' saves and restores the
7056choice of current buffer, like `save-excursion', but without saving or
7057restoring the value of point or the mark. `with-current-buffer'
7058works using `save-current-buffer'.
7059
7060*** The new macro `with-temp-file' lets you do some work in a new buffer and
7061write the output to a specified file. Like `progn', it returns the value
7062of the last form.
7063
7064*** The new macro `with-temp-buffer' lets you do some work in a new buffer,
7065which is discarded after use. Like `progn', it returns the value of the
7066last form. If you wish to return the buffer contents, use (buffer-string)
7067as the last form.
7068
7069*** The new function split-string takes a string, splits it at certain
7070characters, and returns a list of the substrings in between the
7071matches.
7072
7073For example, (split-string "foo bar lose" " +") returns ("foo" "bar" "lose").
7074
7075*** The new macro with-output-to-string executes some Lisp expressions
7076with standard-output set up so that all output feeds into a string.
7077Then it returns that string.
7078
7079For example, if the current buffer name is `foo',
7080
7081(with-output-to-string
7082 (princ "The buffer is ")
7083 (princ (buffer-name)))
7084
7085returns "The buffer is foo".
7086
7087** Non-ASCII characters are now supported, if enable-multibyte-characters
7088is non-nil.
7089
7090These characters have character codes above 256. When inserted in the
7091buffer or stored in a string, they are represented as multibyte
7092characters that occupy several buffer positions each.
7093
7094*** When enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, a single character in
7095a buffer or string can be two or more bytes (as many as four).
7096
7097Buffers and strings are still made up of unibyte elements;
7098character positions and string indices are always measured in bytes.
7099Therefore, moving forward one character can increase the buffer
7100position by 2, 3 or 4. The function forward-char moves by whole
7101characters, and therefore is no longer equivalent to
7102 (lambda (n) (goto-char (+ (point) n))).
7103
7104ASCII characters (codes 0 through 127) are still single bytes, always.
7105Sequences of byte values 128 through 255 are used to represent
7106non-ASCII characters. These sequences are called "multibyte
7107characters".
7108
7109The first byte of a multibyte character is always in the range 128
7110through 159 (octal 0200 through 0237). These values are called
7111"leading codes". The second and subsequent bytes are always in the
7112range 160 through 255 (octal 0240 through 0377). The first byte, the
7113leading code, determines how many bytes long the sequence is.
7114
7115*** The function forward-char moves over characters, and therefore
7116(forward-char 1) may increase point by more than 1 if it moves over a
7117multibyte character. Likewise, delete-char always deletes a
7118character, which may be more than one buffer position.
7119
7120This means that some Lisp programs, which assume that a character is
7121always one buffer position, need to be changed.
7122
7123However, all ASCII characters are always one buffer position.
7124
7125*** The regexp [\200-\377] no longer matches all non-ASCII characters,
7126because when enable-multibyte-characters is non-nil, these characters
7127have codes that are not in the range octal 200 to octal 377. However,
7128the regexp [^\000-\177] does match all non-ASCII characters,
7129guaranteed.
7130
7131*** The function char-boundary-p returns non-nil if position POS is
7132between two characters in the buffer (not in the middle of a
7133character).
7134
7135When the value is non-nil, it says what kind of character follows POS:
7136
7137 0 if POS is at an ASCII character or at the end of range,
7138 1 if POS is before a 2-byte length multi-byte form,
7139 2 if POS is at a head of 3-byte length multi-byte form,
7140 3 if POS is at a head of 4-byte length multi-byte form,
7141 4 if POS is at a head of multi-byte form of a composite character.
7142
7143*** The function char-bytes returns how many bytes the character CHAR uses.
7144
7145*** Strings can contain multibyte characters. The function
7146`length' returns the string length counting bytes, which may be
7147more than the number of characters.
7148
7149You can include a multibyte character in a string constant by writing
7150it literally. You can also represent it with a hex escape,
7151\xNNNNNNN..., using as many digits as necessary. Any character which
7152is not a valid hex digit terminates this construct. If you want to
7153follow it with a character that is a hex digit, write backslash and
7154newline in between; that will terminate the hex escape.
7155
7156*** The function concat-chars takes arguments which are characters
7157and returns a string containing those characters.
7158
7159*** The function sref access a multibyte character in a string.
7160(sref STRING INDX) returns the character in STRING at INDEX. INDEX
7161counts from zero. If INDEX is at a position in the middle of a
7162character, sref signals an error.
7163
7164*** The function chars-in-string returns the number of characters
7165in a string. This is less than the length of the string, if the
7166string contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7167
7168*** The function chars-in-region returns the number of characters
7169in a region from BEG to END. This is less than (- END BEG) if the
7170region contains multibyte characters (the length counts bytes).
7171
7172*** The function string-to-list converts a string to a list of
7173the characters in it. string-to-vector converts a string
7174to a vector of the characters in it.
7175
7176*** The function store-substring alters part of the contents
7177of a string. You call it as follows:
7178
7179 (store-substring STRING IDX OBJ)
7180
7181This says to alter STRING, by storing OBJ starting at index IDX in
7182STRING. OBJ may be either a character or a (smaller) string.
7183This function really does alter the contents of STRING.
7184Since it is impossible to change the length of an existing string,
7185it is an error if OBJ doesn't fit within STRING's actual length.
7186
7187*** char-width returns the width (in columns) of the character CHAR,
7188if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7189
7190*** string-width returns the width (in columns) of the text in STRING,
7191if it were displayed in the current buffer and the selected window.
7192
7193*** truncate-string-to-width shortens a string, if necessary,
7194to fit within a certain number of columns. (Of course, it does
7195not alter the string that you give it; it returns a new string
7196which contains all or just part of the existing string.)
7197
7198(truncate-string-to-width STR END-COLUMN &optional START-COLUMN PADDING)
7199
7200This returns the part of STR up to column END-COLUMN.
7201
7202The optional argument START-COLUMN specifies the starting column.
7203If this is non-nil, then the first START-COLUMN columns of the string
7204are not included in the resulting value.
7205
7206The optional argument PADDING, if non-nil, is a padding character to be added
7207at the beginning and end the resulting string, to extend it to exactly
7208WIDTH columns. If PADDING is nil, that means do not pad; then, if STRING
7209is narrower than WIDTH, the value is equal to STRING.
7210
7211If PADDING and START-COLUMN are both non-nil, and if there is no clean
7212place in STRING that corresponds to START-COLUMN (because one
7213character extends across that column), then the padding character
7214PADDING is added one or more times at the beginning of the result
7215string, so that its columns line up as if it really did start at
7216column START-COLUMN.
7217
7218*** When the functions in the list after-change-functions are called,
7219the third argument is the number of bytes in the pre-change text, not
7220necessarily the number of characters. It is, in effect, the
7221difference in buffer position between the beginning and the end of the
7222changed text, before the change.
7223
7224*** The characters Emacs uses are classified in various character
7225sets, each of which has a name which is a symbol. In general there is
7226one character set for each script, not for each language.
7227
7228**** The function charsetp tests whether an object is a character set name.
7229
7230**** The variable charset-list holds a list of character set names.
7231
7232**** char-charset, given a character code, returns the name of the character
7233set that the character belongs to. (The value is a symbol.)
7234
7235**** split-char, given a character code, returns a list containing the
7236name of the character set, followed by one or two byte-values
7237which identify the character within that character set.
7238
7239**** make-char, given a character set name and one or two subsequent
7240byte-values, constructs a character code. This is roughly the
7241opposite of split-char.
7242
7243**** find-charset-region returns a list of the character sets
7244of all the characters between BEG and END.
7245
7246**** find-charset-string returns a list of the character sets
7247of all the characters in a string.
7248
7249*** Here are the Lisp facilities for working with coding systems
7250and specifying coding systems.
7251
7252**** The function coding-system-list returns a list of all coding
7253system names (symbols). With optional argument t, it returns a list
7254of all distinct base coding systems, not including variants.
7255(Variant coding systems are those like latin-1-dos, latin-1-unix
7256and latin-1-mac which specify the end-of-line conversion as well
7257as what to do about code conversion.)
7258
7259**** coding-system-p tests a symbol to see if it is a coding system
7260name. It returns t if so, nil if not.
7261
7262**** file-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7263for certain file names. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7264except that the PATTERN is matched against the file name.
7265
7266Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7267which file names the element applies to. PATTERN should be a regexp
7268to match against a file name.
7269
7270VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7271a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7272decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7273to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7274systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7275specifies the coding system for encoding.
7276
7277If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7278or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7279
7280**** The variable network-coding-system-alist specifies
7281the coding system to use for network sockets.
7282
7283Each element has the format (PATTERN . VAL), where PATTERN determines
7284which network sockets the element applies to. PATTERN should be
7285either a port number or a regular expression matching some network
7286service names.
7287
7288VAL is a coding system, a cons cell containing two coding systems, or
7289a function symbol. If VAL is a coding system, it is used for both
7290decoding what received from the network stream and encoding what sent
7291to the network stream. If VAL is a cons cell containing two coding
7292systems, the car specifies the coding system for decoding, and the cdr
7293specifies the coding system for encoding.
7294
7295If VAL is a function symbol, the function must return a coding system
7296or a cons cell containing two coding systems, which is used as above.
7297
7298**** process-coding-system-alist specifies which coding systems to use
7299for certain subprocess. It works like network-coding-system-alist,
7300except that the PATTERN is matched against the program name used to
7301start the subprocess.
7302
7303**** The variable default-process-coding-system specifies the coding
7304systems to use for subprocess (and net connection) input and output,
7305when nothing else specifies what to do. The value is a cons cell
7306(OUTPUT-CODING . INPUT-CODING). OUTPUT-CODING applies to output
7307to the subprocess, and INPUT-CODING applies to input from it.
7308
7309**** The variable coding-system-for-write, if non-nil, specifies the
7310coding system to use for writing a file, or for output to a synchronous
7311subprocess.
7312
7313It also applies to any asynchronous subprocess or network connection,
7314but in a different way: the value of coding-system-for-write when you
7315start the subprocess or connection affects that subprocess or
7316connection permanently or until overridden.
7317
7318The variable coding-system-for-write takes precedence over
7319file-coding-system-alist, process-coding-system-alist and
7320network-coding-system-alist, and all other methods of specifying a
7321coding system for output. But most of the time this variable is nil.
7322It exists so that Lisp programs can bind it to a specific coding
7323system for one operation at a time.
7324
7325**** coding-system-for-read applies similarly to input from
7326files, subprocesses or network connections.
7327
7328**** The function process-coding-system tells you what
7329coding systems(s) an existing subprocess is using.
7330The value is a cons cell,
7331 (DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM . ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM)
7332where DECODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for decoding output from
7333the subprocess, and ENCODING-CODING-SYSTEM is used for encoding
7334input to the subprocess.
7335
7336**** The function set-process-coding-system can be used to
7337change the coding systems in use for an existing subprocess.
7338
7339** Emacs has a new facility to help users manage the many
7340customization options. To make a Lisp program work with this facility,
7341you need to use the new macros defgroup and defcustom.
7342
7343You use defcustom instead of defvar, for defining a user option
7344variable. The difference is that you specify two additional pieces of
7345information (usually): the "type" which says what values are
7346legitimate, and the "group" which specifies the hierarchy for
7347customization.
7348
7349Thus, instead of writing
7350
7351 (defvar foo-blurgoze nil
7352 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely.")
7353
7354you would now write this:
7355
7356 (defcustom foo-blurgoze nil
7357 "*Non-nil means that foo will act very blurgozely."
7358 :type 'boolean
7359 :group foo)
7360
7361The type `boolean' means that this variable has only
7362two meaningful states: nil and non-nil. Other type values
7363describe other possibilities; see the manual for Custom
7364for a description of them.
7365
7366The "group" argument is used to specify a group which the option
7367should belong to. You define a new group like this:
7368
7369 (defgroup ispell nil
7370 "Spell checking using Ispell."
7371 :group 'processes)
7372
7373The "group" argument in defgroup specifies the parent group. The root
7374group is called `emacs'; it should not contain any variables itself,
7375but only other groups. The immediate subgroups of `emacs' correspond
7376to the keywords used by C-h p. Under these subgroups come
7377second-level subgroups that belong to individual packages.
7378
7379Each Emacs package should have its own set of groups. A simple
7380package should have just one group; a more complex package should
7381have a hierarchy of its own groups. The sole or root group of a
7382package should be a subgroup of one or more of the "keyword"
7383first-level subgroups.
7384
7385** New `widget' library for inserting UI components in buffers.
7386
7387This library, used by the new custom library, is documented in a
7388separate manual that accompanies Emacs.
7389
7390** easy-mmode
7391
7392The easy-mmode package provides macros and functions that make
7393developing minor modes easier. Roughly, the programmer has to code
7394only the functionality of the minor mode. All the rest--toggles,
7395predicate, and documentation--can be done in one call to the macro
7396`easy-mmode-define-minor-mode' (see the documentation). See also
7397`easy-mmode-define-keymap'.
7398
7399** Text property changes
7400
7401*** The `intangible' property now works on overlays as well as on a
7402text property.
7403
7404*** The new functions next-char-property-change and
7405previous-char-property-change scan through the buffer looking for a
7406place where either a text property or an overlay might change. The
7407functions take two arguments, POSITION and LIMIT. POSITION is the
7408starting position for the scan. LIMIT says where to stop the scan.
7409
7410If no property change is found before LIMIT, the value is LIMIT. If
7411LIMIT is nil, scan goes to the beginning or end of the accessible part
7412of the buffer. If no property change is found, the value is the
7413position of the beginning or end of the buffer.
7414
7415*** In the `local-map' text property or overlay property, the property
7416value can now be a symbol whose function definition is a keymap. This
7417is an alternative to using the keymap itself.
7418
7419** Changes in invisibility features
7420
7421*** Isearch can now temporarily show parts of the buffer which are
7422hidden by an overlay with a invisible property, when the search match
7423is inside that portion of the buffer. To enable this the overlay
7424should have a isearch-open-invisible property which is a function that
7425would be called having the overlay as an argument, the function should
7426make the overlay visible.
7427
7428During incremental search the overlays are shown by modifying the
7429invisible and intangible properties, if beside this more actions are
7430needed the overlay should have a isearch-open-invisible-temporary
7431which is a function. The function is called with 2 arguments: one is
7432the overlay and the second is nil when it should show the overlay and
7433t when it should hide it.
7434
7435*** add-to-invisibility-spec, remove-from-invisibility-spec
7436
7437Modes that use overlays to hide portions of a buffer should set the
7438invisible property of the overlay to the mode's name (or another symbol)
7439and modify the `buffer-invisibility-spec' to include that symbol.
7440Use `add-to-invisibility-spec' and `remove-from-invisibility-spec' to
7441manipulate the `buffer-invisibility-spec'.
7442Here is an example of how to do this:
7443
7444 ;; If we want to display an ellipsis:
7445 (add-to-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7446 ;; If you don't want ellipsis:
7447 (add-to-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7448
7449 ...
7450 (overlay-put (make-overlay beginning end) 'invisible 'my-symbol)
7451
7452 ...
7453 ;; When done with the overlays:
7454 (remove-from-invisibility-spec '(my-symbol . t))
7455 ;; Or respectively:
7456 (remove-from-invisibility-spec 'my-symbol)
7457
7458** Changes in syntax parsing.
7459
7460*** The syntax-directed buffer-scan functions (such as
7461`parse-partial-sexp', `forward-word' and similar functions) can now
7462obey syntax information specified by text properties, if the variable
7463`parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil.
7464
7465If the value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is nil, the behavior
7466is as before: the syntax-table of the current buffer is always
7467used to determine the syntax of the character at the position.
7468
7469When `parse-sexp-lookup-properties' is non-nil, the syntax of a
7470character in the buffer is calculated thus:
7471
7472 a) if the `syntax-table' text-property of that character
7473 is a cons, this cons becomes the syntax-type;
7474
7475 Valid values of `syntax-table' text-property are: nil, a valid
7476 syntax-table, and a valid syntax-table element, i.e.,
7477 a cons cell of the form (SYNTAX-CODE . MATCHING-CHAR).
7478
7479 b) if the character's `syntax-table' text-property
7480 is a syntax table, this syntax table is used
7481 (instead of the syntax-table of the current buffer) to
7482 determine the syntax type of the character.
7483
7484 c) otherwise the syntax-type is determined by the syntax-table
7485 of the current buffer.
7486
7487*** The meaning of \s in regular expressions is also affected by the
7488value of `parse-sexp-lookup-properties'. The details are the same as
7489for the syntax-directed buffer-scan functions.
7490
7491*** There are two new syntax-codes, `!' and `|' (numeric values 14
7492and 15). A character with a code `!' starts a comment which is ended
7493only by another character with the same code (unless quoted). A
7494character with a code `|' starts a string which is ended only by
7495another character with the same code (unless quoted).
7496
7497These codes are mainly meant for use as values of the `syntax-table'
7498text property.
7499
7500*** The function `parse-partial-sexp' has new semantics for the sixth
7501arg COMMENTSTOP. If it is `syntax-table', parse stops after the start
7502of a comment or a string, or after end of a comment or a string.
7503
7504*** The state-list which the return value from `parse-partial-sexp'
7505(and can also be used as an argument) now has an optional ninth
7506element: the character address of the start of last comment or string;
7507nil if none. The fourth and eighth elements have special values if the
7508string/comment is started by a "!" or "|" syntax-code.
7509
7510*** Since new features of `parse-partial-sexp' allow a complete
7511syntactic parsing, `font-lock' no longer supports
7512`font-lock-comment-start-regexp'.
7513
7514** Changes in face features
7515
7516*** The face functions are now unconditionally defined in Emacs, even
7517if it does not support displaying on a device that supports faces.
7518
7519*** The function face-documentation returns the documentation string
7520of a face (or nil if it doesn't have one).
7521
7522*** The function face-bold-p returns t if a face should be bold.
7523set-face-bold-p sets that flag.
7524
7525*** The function face-italic-p returns t if a face should be italic.
7526set-face-italic-p sets that flag.
7527
7528*** You can now specify foreground and background colors for text
7529by adding elements of the form (foreground-color . COLOR-NAME)
7530and (background-color . COLOR-NAME) to the list of faces in
7531the `face' property (either the character's text property or an
7532overlay property).
7533
7534This means that you no longer need to create named faces to use
7535arbitrary colors in a Lisp package.
7536
7537** Changes in file-handling functions
7538
7539*** File-access primitive functions no longer discard an extra redundant
7540directory name from the beginning of the file name. In other words,
7541they no longer do anything special with // or /~. That conversion
7542is now done only in substitute-in-file-name.
7543
7544This makes it possible for a Lisp program to open a file whose name
7545begins with ~.
7546
7547*** If copy-file is unable to set the date of the output file,
7548it now signals an error with the condition file-date-error.
7549
7550*** The inode number returned by file-attributes may be an integer (if
7551the number fits in a Lisp integer) or a list of integers.
7552
7553*** insert-file-contents can now read from a special file,
7554as long as the arguments VISIT and REPLACE are nil.
7555
7556*** The RAWFILE arg to find-file-noselect, if non-nil, now suppresses
7557character code conversion as well as other things.
7558
7559Meanwhile, this feature does work with remote file names
7560(formerly it did not).
7561
7562*** Lisp packages which create temporary files should use the TMPDIR
7563environment variable to decide which directory to put them in.
7564
7565*** interpreter-mode-alist elements now specify regexps
7566instead of constant strings.
7567
7568*** expand-file-name no longer treats `//' or `/~' specially. It used
7569to delete all the text of a file name up through the first slash of
7570any `//' or `/~' sequence. Now it passes them straight through.
7571
7572substitute-in-file-name continues to treat those sequences specially,
7573in the same way as before.
7574
7575*** The variable `format-alist' is more general now.
7576The FROM-FN and TO-FN in a format definition can now be strings
7577which specify shell commands to use as filters to perform conversion.
7578
7579*** The new function access-file tries to open a file, and signals an
7580error if that fails. If the open succeeds, access-file does nothing
7581else, and returns nil.
7582
7583*** The function insert-directory now signals an error if the specified
7584directory cannot be listed.
7585
7586** Changes in minibuffer input
7587
7588*** The functions read-buffer, read-variable, read-command, read-string
7589read-file-name, read-from-minibuffer and completing-read now take an
7590additional argument which specifies the default value. If this
7591argument is non-nil, it should be a string; that string is used in two
7592ways:
7593
7594 It is returned if the user enters empty input.
7595 It is available through the history command M-n.
7596
7597*** The functions read-string, read-from-minibuffer,
7598read-no-blanks-input and completing-read now take an additional
7599argument INHERIT-INPUT-METHOD. If this is non-nil, then the
7600minibuffer inherits the current input method and the setting of
7601enable-multibyte-characters from the previously current buffer.
7602
7603In an interactive spec, you can use M instead of s to read an
7604argument in this way.
7605
7606*** All minibuffer input functions discard text properties
7607from the text you enter in the minibuffer, unless the variable
7608minibuffer-allow-text-properties is non-nil.
7609
7610** Echo area features
7611
7612*** Clearing the echo area now runs the normal hook
7613echo-area-clear-hook. Note that the echo area can be used while the
7614minibuffer is active; in that case, the minibuffer is still active
7615after the echo area is cleared.
7616
7617*** The function current-message returns the message currently displayed
7618in the echo area, or nil if there is none.
7619
7620** Keyboard input features
7621
7622*** tty-erase-char is a new variable that reports which character was
7623set up as the terminal's erase character when time Emacs was started.
7624
7625*** num-nonmacro-input-events is the total number of input events
7626received so far from the terminal. It does not count those generated
7627by keyboard macros.
7628
7629** Frame-related changes
7630
7631*** make-frame runs the normal hook before-make-frame-hook just before
7632creating a frame, and just after creating a frame it runs the abnormal
7633hook after-make-frame-functions with the new frame as arg.
7634
7635*** The new hook window-configuration-change-hook is now run every time
7636the window configuration has changed. The frame whose configuration
7637has changed is the selected frame when the hook is run.
7638
7639*** Each frame now independently records the order for recently
7640selected buffers, in its buffer-list frame parameter, so that the
7641value of other-buffer is now based on the buffers recently displayed
7642in the selected frame.
7643
7644*** The value of the frame parameter vertical-scroll-bars
7645is now `left', `right' or nil. A non-nil value specifies
7646which side of the window to put the scroll bars on.
7647
7648** X Windows features
7649
7650*** You can examine X resources for other applications by binding
7651x-resource-class around a call to x-get-resource. The usual value of
7652x-resource-class is "Emacs", which is the correct value for Emacs.
7653
7654*** In menus, checkboxes and radio buttons now actually work.
7655The menu displays the current status of the box or button.
7656
7657*** The function x-list-fonts now takes an optional fourth argument
7658MAXIMUM which sets a limit on how many matching fonts to return.
7659A smaller value of MAXIMUM makes the function faster.
7660
7661If the only question is whether *any* font matches the pattern,
7662it is good to supply 1 for this argument.
7663
7664** Subprocess features
7665
7666*** A reminder: it is no longer necessary for subprocess filter
7667functions and sentinels to do save-match-data, because Emacs does this
7668automatically.
7669
7670*** The new function shell-command-to-string executes a shell command
7671and returns the output from the command as a string.
7672
7673*** The new function process-contact returns t for a child process,
7674and (HOSTNAME SERVICE) for a net connection.
7675
7676** An error in running pre-command-hook or post-command-hook
7677does clear the variable to nil. The documentation was wrong before.
7678
7679** In define-key-after, if AFTER is t, the new binding now always goes
7680at the end of the keymap. If the keymap is a menu, this means it
7681goes after the other menu items.
7682
7683** If you have a program that makes several changes in the same area
7684of the buffer, you can use the macro combine-after-change-calls
7685around that Lisp code to make it faster when after-change hooks
7686are in use.
7687
7688The macro arranges to call the after-change functions just once for a
7689series of several changes--if that seems safe.
7690
7691Don't alter the variables after-change-functions and
7692after-change-function within the body of a combine-after-change-calls
7693form.
7694
7695** If you define an abbrev (with define-abbrev) whose EXPANSION
7696is not a string, then the abbrev does not expand in the usual sense,
7697but its hook is still run.
7698
7699** Normally, the Lisp debugger is not used (even if you have enabled it)
7700for errors that are handled by condition-case.
7701
7702If you set debug-on-signal to a non-nil value, then the debugger is called
7703regardless of whether there is a handler for the condition. This is
7704useful for debugging problems that happen inside of a condition-case.
7705
7706This mode of operation seems to be unreliable in other ways. Errors that
7707are normal and ought to be handled, perhaps in timers or process
7708filters, will instead invoke the debugger. So don't say you weren't
7709warned.
7710
7711** The new variable ring-bell-function lets you specify your own
7712way for Emacs to "ring the bell".
7713
7714** If run-at-time's TIME argument is t, the action is repeated at
7715integral multiples of REPEAT from the epoch; this is useful for
7716functions like display-time.
7717
7718** You can use the function locate-library to find the precise file
7719name of a Lisp library. This isn't new, but wasn't documented before.
7720
7721** Commands for entering view mode have new optional arguments that
7722can be used from Lisp. Low-level entrance to and exit from view mode
7723is done by functions view-mode-enter and view-mode-exit.
7724
7725** batch-byte-compile-file now makes Emacs return a nonzero status code
7726if there is an error in compilation.
7727
7728** pop-to-buffer, switch-to-buffer-other-window and
7729switch-to-buffer-other-frame now accept an additional optional
7730argument NORECORD, much like switch-to-buffer. If it is non-nil,
7731they don't put the buffer at the front of the buffer list.
7732
7733** If your .emacs file leaves the *scratch* buffer non-empty,
7734Emacs does not display the startup message, so as to avoid changing
7735the *scratch* buffer.
7736
7737** The new function regexp-opt returns an efficient regexp to match a string.
7738The arguments are STRINGS and (optionally) PAREN. This function can be used
7739where regexp matching or searching is intensively used and speed is important,
7740e.g., in Font Lock mode.
7741
7742** The variable buffer-display-count is local to each buffer,
7743and is incremented each time the buffer is displayed in a window.
7744It starts at 0 when the buffer is created.
7745
7746** The new function compose-mail starts composing a mail message
7747using the user's chosen mail composition agent (specified with the
7748variable mail-user-agent). It has variants compose-mail-other-window
7749and compose-mail-other-frame.
7750
7751** The `user-full-name' function now takes an optional parameter which
7752can either be a number (the UID) or a string (the login name). The
7753full name of the specified user will be returned.
7754
7755** Lisp packages that load files of customizations, or any other sort
7756of user profile, should obey the variable init-file-user in deciding
7757where to find it. They should load the profile of the user name found
7758in that variable. If init-file-user is nil, meaning that the -q
7759option was used, then Lisp packages should not load the customization
7760files at all.
7761
7762** format-time-string now allows you to specify the field width
7763and type of padding. This works as in printf: you write the field
7764width as digits in the middle of a %-construct. If you start
7765the field width with 0, it means to pad with zeros.
7766
7767For example, %S normally specifies the number of seconds since the
7768minute; %03S means to pad this with zeros to 3 positions, %_3S to pad
7769with spaces to 3 positions. Plain %3S pads with zeros, because that
7770is how %S normally pads to two positions.
7771
7772** thing-at-point now supports a new kind of "thing": url.
7773
7774** imenu.el changes.
7775
7776You can now specify a function to be run when selecting an
7777item from menu created by imenu.
7778
7779An example of using this feature: if we define imenu items for the
7780#include directives in a C file, we can open the included file when we
7781select one of those items.
7782\f
7783* Emacs 19.34 is a bug-fix release with no user-visible changes.
7784\f
7785* Changes in Emacs 19.33.
7786
7787** Bibtex mode no longer turns on Auto Fill automatically. (No major
7788mode should do that--it is the user's choice.)
7789
7790** The variable normal-auto-fill-function specifies the function to
7791use for auto-fill-function, if and when Auto Fill is turned on.
7792Major modes can set this locally to alter how Auto Fill works.
7793\f
7794* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.32
7795
7796** C-x f with no argument now signals an error.
7797To set the fill column at the current column, use C-u C-x f.
7798
7799** Expanding dynamic abbrevs with M-/ is now smarter about case
7800conversion. If you type the abbreviation with mixed case, and it
7801matches the beginning of the expansion including case, then the
7802expansion is copied verbatim. Using SPC M-/ to copy an additional
7803word always copies it verbatim except when the previous copied word is
7804all caps.
7805
7806** On a non-windowing terminal, which can display only one Emacs frame
7807at a time, creating a new frame with C-x 5 2 also selects that frame.
7808
7809When using a display that can show multiple frames at once, C-x 5 2
7810does make the frame visible, but does not select it. This is the same
7811as in previous Emacs versions.
7812
7813** You can use C-x 5 2 to create multiple frames on MSDOS, just as on a
7814non-X terminal on Unix. Of course, only one frame is visible at any
7815time, since your terminal doesn't have the ability to display multiple
7816frames.
7817
7818** On Windows, set win32-pass-alt-to-system to a non-nil value
7819if you would like tapping the Alt key to invoke the Windows menu.
7820This feature is not enabled by default; since the Alt key is also the
7821Meta key, it is too easy and painful to activate this feature by
7822accident.
7823
7824** The command apply-macro-to-region-lines repeats the last defined
7825keyboard macro once for each complete line within the current region.
7826It does this line by line, by moving point to the beginning of that
7827line and then executing the macro.
7828
7829This command is not new, but was never documented before.
7830
7831** You can now use Mouse-1 to place the region around a string constant
7832(something surrounded by doublequote characters or other delimiter
7833characters of like syntax) by double-clicking on one of the delimiting
7834characters.
7835
7836** Font Lock mode
7837
7838*** Font Lock support modes
7839
7840Font Lock can be configured to use Fast Lock mode and Lazy Lock mode (see
7841below) in a flexible way. Rather than adding the appropriate function to the
7842hook font-lock-mode-hook, you can use the new variable font-lock-support-mode
7843to control which modes have Fast Lock mode or Lazy Lock mode turned on when
7844Font Lock mode is enabled.
7845
7846For example, to use Fast Lock mode when Font Lock mode is turned on, put:
7847
7848 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'fast-lock-mode)
7849
7850in your ~/.emacs.
7851
7852*** lazy-lock
7853
7854The lazy-lock package speeds up Font Lock mode by making fontification occur
7855only when necessary, such as when a previously unfontified part of the buffer
7856becomes visible in a window. When you create a buffer with Font Lock mode and
7857Lazy Lock mode turned on, the buffer is not fontified. When certain events
7858occur (such as scrolling), Lazy Lock makes sure that the visible parts of the
7859buffer are fontified. Lazy Lock also defers on-the-fly fontification until
7860Emacs has been idle for a given amount of time.
7861
7862To use this package, put in your ~/.emacs:
7863
7864 (setq font-lock-support-mode 'lazy-lock-mode)
7865
7866To control the package behaviour, see the documentation for `lazy-lock-mode'.
7867
7868** Changes in BibTeX mode.
7869
7870*** For all entries allow spaces and tabs between opening brace or
7871paren and key.
7872
7873*** Non-escaped double-quoted characters (as in `Sch"of') are now
7874supported.
7875
7876** Gnus changes.
7877
7878Gnus, the Emacs news reader, has undergone further rewriting. Many new
7879commands and variables have been added. There should be no
7880significant incompatibilities between this Gnus version and the
7881previously released version, except in the message composition area.
7882
7883Below is a list of the more user-visible changes. Coding changes
7884between Gnus 5.1 and 5.2 are more extensive.
7885
7886*** A new message composition mode is used. All old customization
7887variables for mail-mode, rnews-reply-mode and gnus-msg are now
7888obsolete.
7889
7890*** Gnus is now able to generate "sparse" threads -- threads where
7891missing articles are represented by empty nodes.
7892
7893 (setq gnus-build-sparse-threads 'some)
7894
7895*** Outgoing articles are stored on a special archive server.
7896
7897 To disable this: (setq gnus-message-archive-group nil)
7898
7899*** Partial thread regeneration now happens when articles are
7900referred.
7901
7902*** Gnus can make use of GroupLens predictions:
7903
7904 (setq gnus-use-grouplens t)
7905
7906*** A trn-line tree buffer can be displayed.
7907
7908 (setq gnus-use-trees t)
7909
7910*** An nn-like pick-and-read minor mode is available for the summary
7911buffers.
7912
7913 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-mode-hook 'gnus-pick-mode)
7914
7915*** In binary groups you can use a special binary minor mode:
7916
7917 `M-x gnus-binary-mode'
7918
7919*** Groups can be grouped in a folding topic hierarchy.
7920
7921 (add-hook 'gnus-group-mode-hook 'gnus-topic-mode)
7922
7923*** Gnus can re-send and bounce mail.
7924
7925 Use the `S D r' and `S D b'.
7926
7927*** Groups can now have a score, and bubbling based on entry frequency
7928is possible.
7929
7930 (add-hook 'gnus-summary-exit-hook 'gnus-summary-bubble-group)
7931
7932*** Groups can be process-marked, and commands can be performed on
7933groups of groups.
7934
7935*** Caching is possible in virtual groups.
7936
7937*** nndoc now understands all kinds of digests, mail boxes, rnews news
7938batches, ClariNet briefs collections, and just about everything else.
7939
7940*** Gnus has a new backend (nnsoup) to create/read SOUP packets.
7941
7942*** The Gnus cache is much faster.
7943
7944*** Groups can be sorted according to many criteria.
7945
7946 For instance: (setq gnus-group-sort-function 'gnus-group-sort-by-rank)
7947
7948*** New group parameters have been introduced to set list-address and
7949expiration times.
7950
7951*** All formatting specs allow specifying faces to be used.
7952
7953*** There are several more commands for setting/removing/acting on
7954process marked articles on the `M P' submap.
7955
7956*** The summary buffer can be limited to show parts of the available
7957articles based on a wide range of criteria. These commands have been
7958bound to keys on the `/' submap.
7959
7960*** Articles can be made persistent -- as an alternative to saving
7961articles with the `*' command.
7962
7963*** All functions for hiding article elements are now toggles.
7964
7965*** Article headers can be buttonized.
7966
7967 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-add-buttons-to-head)
7968
7969*** All mail backends support fetching articles by Message-ID.
7970
7971*** Duplicate mail can now be treated properly. See the
7972`nnmail-treat-duplicates' variable.
7973
7974*** All summary mode commands are available directly from the article
7975buffer.
7976
7977*** Frames can be part of `gnus-buffer-configuration'.
7978
7979*** Mail can be re-scanned by a daemonic process.
7980
7981*** Gnus can make use of NoCeM files to filter spam.
7982
7983 (setq gnus-use-nocem t)
7984
7985*** Groups can be made permanently visible.
7986
7987 (setq gnus-permanently-visible-groups "^nnml:")
7988
7989*** Many new hooks have been introduced to make customizing easier.
7990
7991*** Gnus respects the Mail-Copies-To header.
7992
7993*** Threads can be gathered by looking at the References header.
7994
7995 (setq gnus-summary-thread-gathering-function
7996 'gnus-gather-threads-by-references)
7997
7998*** Read articles can be stored in a special backlog buffer to avoid
7999refetching.
8000
8001 (setq gnus-keep-backlog 50)
8002
8003*** A clean copy of the current article is always stored in a separate
8004buffer to allow easier treatment.
8005
8006*** Gnus can suggest where to save articles. See `gnus-split-methods'.
8007
8008*** Gnus doesn't have to do as much prompting when saving.
8009
8010 (setq gnus-prompt-before-saving t)
8011
8012*** gnus-uu can view decoded files asynchronously while fetching
8013articles.
8014
8015 (setq gnus-uu-grabbed-file-functions 'gnus-uu-grab-view)
8016
8017*** Filling in the article buffer now works properly on cited text.
8018
8019*** Hiding cited text adds buttons to toggle hiding, and how much
8020cited text to hide is now customizable.
8021
8022 (setq gnus-cited-lines-visible 2)
8023
8024*** Boring headers can be hidden.
8025
8026 (add-hook 'gnus-article-display-hook 'gnus-article-hide-boring-headers)
8027
8028*** Default scoring values can now be set from the menu bar.
8029
8030*** Further syntax checking of outgoing articles have been added.
8031
8032The Gnus manual has been expanded. It explains all these new features
8033in greater detail.
8034\f
8035* Lisp Changes in Emacs 19.32
8036
8037** The function set-visited-file-name now accepts an optional
8038second argument NO-QUERY. If it is non-nil, then the user is not
8039asked for confirmation in the case where the specified file already
8040exists.
8041
8042** The variable print-length applies to printing vectors and bitvectors,
8043as well as lists.
8044
8045** The new function keymap-parent returns the parent keymap
8046of a given keymap.
8047
8048** The new function set-keymap-parent specifies a new parent for a
8049given keymap. The arguments are KEYMAP and PARENT. PARENT must be a
8050keymap or nil.
8051
8052** Sometimes menu keymaps use a command name, a symbol, which is really
8053an automatically generated alias for some other command, the "real"
8054name. In such a case, you should give that alias symbol a non-nil
8055menu-alias property. That property tells the menu system to look for
8056equivalent keys for the real name instead of equivalent keys for the
8057alias.
8058\f
8059* Editing Changes in Emacs 19.31
8060
8061** Freedom of the press restricted in the United States.
8062
8063Emacs has been censored in accord with the Communications Decency Act.
8064This includes removing some features of the doctor program. That law
8065was described by its supporters as a ban on pornography, but it bans
8066far more than that. The Emacs distribution has never contained any
8067pornography, but parts of it were nonetheless prohibited.
8068
8069For information on US government censorship of the Internet, and what
8070you can do to bring back freedom of the press, see the web site
8071`http://www.vtw.org/'.
8072
8073** A note about C mode indentation customization.
8074
8075The old (Emacs 19.29) ways of specifying a C indentation style
8076do not normally work in the new implementation of C mode.
8077It has its own methods of customizing indentation, which are
8078much more powerful than the old C mode. See the Editing Programs
8079chapter of the manual for details.
8080
8081However, you can load the library cc-compat to make the old
8082customization variables take effect.
8083
8084** Marking with the mouse.
8085
8086When you mark a region with the mouse, the region now remains
8087highlighted until the next input event, regardless of whether you are
8088using M-x transient-mark-mode.
8089
8090** Improved Windows NT/95 support.
8091
8092*** Emacs now supports scroll bars on Windows NT and Windows 95.
8093
8094*** Emacs now supports subprocesses on Windows 95. (Subprocesses used
8095to work on NT only and not on 95.)
8096
8097*** There are difficulties with subprocesses, though, due to problems
8098in Windows, beyond the control of Emacs. They work fine as long as
8099you run Windows applications. The problems arise when you run a DOS
8100application in a subprocesses. Since current shells run as DOS
8101applications, these problems are significant.
8102
8103If you run a DOS application in a subprocess, then the application is
8104likely to busy-wait, which means that your machine will be 100% busy.
8105However, if you don't mind the temporary heavy load, the subprocess
8106will work OK as long as you tell it to terminate before you start any
8107other DOS application as a subprocess.
8108
8109Emacs is unable to terminate or interrupt a DOS subprocess.
8110You have to do this by providing input directly to the subprocess.
8111
8112If you run two DOS applications at the same time in two separate
8113subprocesses, even if one of them is asynchronous, you will probably
8114have to reboot your machine--until then, it will remain 100% busy.
8115Windows simply does not cope when one Windows process tries to run two
8116separate DOS subprocesses. Typing CTL-ALT-DEL and then choosing
8117Shutdown seems to work although it may take a few minutes.
8118
8119** M-x resize-minibuffer-mode.
8120
8121This command, not previously mentioned in NEWS, toggles a mode in
8122which the minibuffer window expands to show as many lines as the
8123minibuffer contains.
8124
8125** `title' frame parameter and resource.
8126
8127The `title' X resource now specifies just the frame title, nothing else.
8128It does not affect the name used for looking up other X resources.
8129It works by setting the new `title' frame parameter, which likewise
8130affects just the displayed title of the frame.
8131
8132The `name' parameter continues to do what it used to do:
8133it specifies the frame name for looking up X resources,
8134and also serves as the default for the displayed title
8135when the `title' parameter is unspecified or nil.
8136
8137** Emacs now uses the X toolkit by default, if you have a new
8138enough version of X installed (X11R5 or newer).
8139
8140** When you compile Emacs with the Motif widget set, Motif handles the
8141F10 key by activating the menu bar. To avoid confusion, the usual
8142Emacs binding of F10 is replaced with a no-op when using Motif.
8143
8144If you want to be able to use F10 in Emacs, you can rebind the Motif
8145menubar to some other key which you don't use. To do so, add
8146something like this to your X resources file. This example rebinds
8147the Motif menu bar activation key to S-F12:
8148
8149 Emacs*defaultVirtualBindings: osfMenuBar : Shift<Key>F12
8150
8151** In overwrite mode, DEL now inserts spaces in most cases
8152to replace the characters it "deletes".
8153
8154** The Rmail summary now shows the number of lines in each message.
8155
8156** Rmail has a new command M-x unforward-rmail-message, which extracts
8157a forwarded message from the message that forwarded it. To use it,
8158select a message which contains a forwarded message and then type the command.
8159It inserts the forwarded message as a separate Rmail message
8160immediately after the selected one.
8161
8162This command also undoes the textual modifications that are standardly
8163made, as part of forwarding, by Rmail and other mail reader programs.
8164
8165** Turning off saving of .saves-... files in your home directory.
8166
8167Each Emacs session writes a file named .saves-... in your home
8168directory to record which files M-x recover-session should recover.
8169If you exit Emacs normally with C-x C-c, it deletes that file. If
8170Emacs or the operating system crashes, the file remains for M-x
8171recover-session.
8172
8173You can turn off the writing of these files by setting
8174auto-save-list-file-name to nil. If you do this, M-x recover-session
8175will not work.
8176
8177Some previous Emacs versions failed to delete these files even on
8178normal exit. This is fixed now. If you are thinking of turning off
8179this feature because of past experiences with versions that had this
8180bug, it would make sense to check whether you still want to do so
8181now that the bug is fixed.
8182
8183** Changes to Version Control (VC)
8184
8185There is a new variable, vc-follow-symlinks. It indicates what to do
8186when you visit a link to a file that is under version control.
8187Editing the file through the link bypasses the version control system,
8188which is dangerous and probably not what you want.
8189
8190If this variable is t, VC follows the link and visits the real file,
8191telling you about it in the echo area. If it is `ask' (the default),
8192VC asks for confirmation whether it should follow the link. If nil,
8193the link is visited and a warning displayed.
8194
8195** iso-acc.el now lets you specify a choice of language.
8196Languages include "latin-1" (the default) and "latin-2" (which
8197is designed for entering ISO Latin-2 characters).
8198
8199There are also choices for specific human languages such as French and
8200Portuguese. These are subsets of Latin-1, which differ in that they
8201enable only the accent characters needed for particular language.
8202The other accent characters, not needed for the chosen language,
8203remain normal.
8204
8205** Posting articles and sending mail now has M-TAB completion on various
8206header fields (Newsgroups, To, CC, ...).
8207
8208Completion in the Newsgroups header depends on the list of groups
8209known to your news reader. Completion in the Followup-To header
8210offers those groups which are in the Newsgroups header, since
8211Followup-To usually just holds one of those.
8212
8213Completion in fields that hold mail addresses works based on the list
8214of local users plus your aliases. Additionally, if your site provides
8215a mail directory or a specific host to use for any unrecognized user
8216name, you can arrange to query that host for completion also. (See the
8217documentation of variables `mail-directory-process' and
8218`mail-directory-stream'.)
8219
8220** A greatly extended sgml-mode offers new features such as (to be configured)
8221skeletons with completing read for tags and attributes, typing named
8222characters including optionally all 8bit characters, making tags invisible
8223with optional alternate display text, skipping and deleting tag(pair)s.
8224
8225Note: since Emacs' syntax feature cannot limit the special meaning of ', " and
8226- to inside <>, for some texts the result, especially of font locking, may be
8227wrong (see `sgml-specials' if you get wrong results).
8228
8229The derived html-mode configures this with tags and attributes more or
8230less HTML3ish. It also offers optional quick keys like C-c 1 for
8231headline or C-c u for unordered list (see `html-quick-keys'). Edit /
8232Text Properties / Face or M-g combinations create tags as applicable.
8233Outline minor mode is supported and level 1 font-locking tries to
8234fontify tag contents (which only works when they fit on one line, due
8235to a limitation in font-lock).
8236
8237External viewing via browse-url can occur automatically upon saving.
8238
8239** M-x imenu-add-to-menubar now adds to the menu bar for the current
8240buffer only. If you want to put an Imenu item in the menu bar for all
8241buffers that use a particular major mode, use the mode hook, as in
8242this example:
8243
8244 (add-hook 'emacs-lisp-mode-hook
8245 '(lambda () (imenu-add-to-menubar "Index")))
8246
8247** Changes in BibTeX mode.
8248
8249*** Field names may now contain digits, hyphens, and underscores.
8250
8251*** Font Lock mode is now supported.
8252
8253*** bibtex-make-optional-field is no longer interactive.
8254
8255*** If bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is non-nil, inserting new
8256entries is now done with a faster algorithm. However, inserting
8257will fail in this case if the buffer contains invalid entries or
8258isn't in sorted order, so you should finish each entry with C-c C-c
8259(bibtex-close-entry) after you have inserted or modified it.
8260The default value of bibtex-maintain-sorted-entries is nil.
8261
8262*** Function `show-all' is no longer bound to a key, since C-u C-c C-q
8263does the same job.
8264
8265*** Entries with quotes inside quote-delimited fields (as `author =
8266"Stefan Sch{\"o}f"') are now supported.
8267
8268*** Case in field names doesn't matter anymore when searching for help
8269text.
8270
8271** Font Lock mode
8272
8273*** Global Font Lock mode
8274
8275Font Lock mode can be turned on globally, in buffers that support it, by the
8276new command global-font-lock-mode. You can use the new variable
8277font-lock-global-modes to control which modes have Font Lock mode automagically
8278turned on. By default, this variable is set so that Font Lock mode is turned
8279on globally where the buffer mode supports it.
8280
8281For example, to automagically turn on Font Lock mode where supported, put:
8282
8283 (global-font-lock-mode t)
8284
8285in your ~/.emacs.
8286
8287*** Local Refontification
8288
8289In Font Lock mode, editing a line automatically refontifies that line only.
8290However, if your change alters the syntactic context for following lines,
8291those lines remain incorrectly fontified. To refontify them, use the new
8292command M-g M-g (font-lock-fontify-block).
8293
8294In certain major modes, M-g M-g refontifies the entire current function.
8295(The variable font-lock-mark-block-function controls how to find the
8296current function.) In other major modes, M-g M-g refontifies 16 lines
8297above and below point.
8298
8299With a prefix argument N, M-g M-g refontifies N lines above and below point.
8300
8301** Follow mode
8302
8303Follow mode is a new minor mode combining windows showing the same
8304buffer into one tall "virtual window". The windows are typically two
8305side-by-side windows. Follow mode makes them scroll together as if
8306they were a unit. To use it, go to a frame with just one window,
8307split it into two side-by-side windows using C-x 3, and then type M-x
8308follow-mode.
8309
8310M-x follow-mode turns off Follow mode if it is already enabled.
8311
8312To display two side-by-side windows and activate Follow mode, use the
8313command M-x follow-delete-other-windows-and-split.
8314
8315** hide-show changes.
8316
8317The hooks hs-hide-hooks and hs-show-hooks have been renamed
8318to hs-hide-hook and hs-show-hook, to follow the convention for
8319normal hooks.
8320
8321** Simula mode now has a menu containing the most important commands.
8322The new command simula-indent-exp is bound to C-M-q.
8323
8324** etags can now handle programs written in Erlang. Files are
8325recognised by the extensions .erl and .hrl. The tagged lines are
8326those that begin a function, record, or macro.
8327
8328** MSDOS Changes
8329
8330*** It is now possible to compile Emacs with the version 2 of DJGPP.
8331Compilation with DJGPP version 1 also still works.
8332
8333*** The documentation of DOS-specific aspects of Emacs was rewritten
8334and expanded; see the ``MS-DOS'' node in the on-line docs.
8335
8336*** Emacs now uses ~ for backup file names, not .bak.
8337
8338*** You can simulate mouse-3 on two-button mice by simultaneously
8339pressing both mouse buttons.
8340
8341*** A number of packages and commands which previously failed or had
8342restricted functionality on MS-DOS, now work. The most important ones
8343are:
8344
8345**** Printing (both with `M-x lpr-buffer' and with `ps-print' package)
8346now works.
8347
8348**** `Ediff' works (in a single-frame mode).
8349
8350**** `M-x display-time' can be used on MS-DOS (due to the new
8351implementation of Emacs timers, see below).
8352
8353**** `Dired' supports Unix-style shell wildcards.
8354
8355**** The `c-macro-expand' command now works as on other platforms.
8356
8357**** `M-x recover-session' works.
8358
8359**** `M-x list-colors-display' displays all the available colors.
8360
8361**** The `TPU-EDT' package works.
8362\f
8363* Lisp changes in Emacs 19.31.
8364
8365** The function using-unix-filesystems on Windows NT and Windows 95
8366tells Emacs to read and write files assuming that they reside on a
8367remote Unix filesystem. No CR/LF translation is done on any files in
8368this case. Invoking using-unix-filesystems with t activates this
8369behavior, and invoking it with any other value deactivates it.
8370
8371** Change in system-type and system-configuration values.
8372
8373The value of system-type on a Linux-based GNU system is now `lignux',
8374not `linux'. This means that some programs which use `system-type'
8375need to be changed. The value of `system-configuration' will also
8376be different.
8377
8378It is generally recommended to use `system-configuration' rather
8379than `system-type'.
8380
8381See the file LINUX-GNU in this directory for more about this.
8382
8383** The functions shell-command and dired-call-process
8384now run file name handlers for default-directory, if it has them.
8385
8386** Undoing the deletion of text now restores the positions of markers
8387that pointed into or next to the deleted text.
8388
8389** Timers created with run-at-time now work internally to Emacs, and
8390no longer use a separate process. Therefore, they now work more
8391reliably and can be used for shorter time delays.
8392
8393The new function run-with-timer is a convenient way to set up a timer
8394to run a specified amount of time after the present. A call looks
8395like this:
8396
8397 (run-with-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8398
8399SECS says how many seconds should elapse before the timer happens.
8400It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the timer
8401becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments ARGS.
8402
8403REPEAT gives the interval for repeating the timer (measured in
8404seconds). It may be an integer or a floating point number. nil or 0
8405means don't repeat at all--call FUNCTION just once.
8406
8407*** with-timeout provides an easy way to do something but give
8408up if too much time passes.
8409
8410 (with-timeout (SECONDS TIMEOUT-FORMS...) BODY...)
8411
8412This executes BODY, but gives up after SECONDS seconds.
8413If it gives up, it runs the TIMEOUT-FORMS and returns the value
8414of the last one of them. Normally it returns the value of the last
8415form in BODY.
8416
8417*** You can now arrange to call a function whenever Emacs is idle for
8418a certain length of time. To do this, call run-with-idle-timer. A
8419call looks like this:
8420
8421 (run-with-idle-timer SECS REPEAT FUNCTION ARGS...)
8422
8423SECS says how many seconds of idleness should elapse before the timer
8424runs. It may be an integer or a floating point number. When the
8425timer becomes ripe, the action is to call FUNCTION with arguments
8426ARGS.
8427
8428Emacs becomes idle whenever it finishes executing a keyboard or mouse
8429command. It remains idle until it receives another keyboard or mouse
8430command.
8431
8432REPEAT, if non-nil, means this timer should be activated again each
8433time Emacs becomes idle and remains idle for SECS seconds The timer
8434does not repeat if Emacs *remains* idle; it runs at most once after
8435each time Emacs becomes idle.
8436
8437If REPEAT is nil, the timer runs just once, the first time Emacs is
8438idle for SECS seconds.
8439
8440*** post-command-idle-hook is now obsolete; you shouldn't use it at
8441all, because it interferes with the idle timer mechanism. If your
8442programs use post-command-idle-hook, convert them to use idle timers
8443instead.
8444
8445*** y-or-n-p-with-timeout lets you ask a question but give up if
8446there is no answer within a certain time.
8447
8448 (y-or-n-p-with-timeout PROMPT SECONDS DEFAULT-VALUE)
8449
8450asks the question PROMPT (just like y-or-n-p). If the user answers
8451within SECONDS seconds, it returns the answer that the user gave.
8452Otherwise it gives up after SECONDS seconds, and returns DEFAULT-VALUE.
8453
8454** Minor change to `encode-time': you can now pass more than seven
8455arguments. If you do that, the first six arguments have the usual
8456meaning, the last argument is interpreted as the time zone, and the
8457arguments in between are ignored.
8458
8459This means that it works to use the list returned by `decode-time' as
8460the list of arguments for `encode-time'.
8461
8462** The default value of load-path now includes the directory
8463/usr/local/share/emacs/VERSION/site-lisp In addition to
8464/usr/local/share/emacs/site-lisp. You can use this new directory for
8465site-specific Lisp packages that belong with a particular Emacs
8466version.
8467
8468It is not unusual for a Lisp package that works well in one Emacs
8469version to cause trouble in another. Sometimes packages need updating
8470for incompatible changes; sometimes they look at internal data that
8471has changed; sometimes the package has been installed in Emacs itself
8472and the installed version should be used. Whatever the reason for the
8473problem, this new feature makes it easier to solve.
8474
8475** When your program contains a fixed file name (like .completions or
8476.abbrev.defs), the file name usually needs to be different on operating
8477systems with limited file name syntax.
8478
8479Now you can avoid ad-hoc conditionals by using the function
8480convert-standard-filename to convert the file name to a proper form
8481for each operating system. Here is an example of use, from the file
8482completions.el:
8483
8484(defvar save-completions-file-name
8485 (convert-standard-filename "~/.completions")
8486 "*The filename to save completions to.")
8487
8488This sets the variable save-completions-file-name to a value that
8489depends on the operating system, because the definition of
8490convert-standard-filename depends on the operating system. On
8491Unix-like systems, it returns the specified file name unchanged. On
8492MS-DOS, it adapts the name to fit the limitations of that system.
8493
8494** The interactive spec N now returns the numeric prefix argument
8495rather than the raw prefix argument. (It still reads a number using the
8496minibuffer if there is no prefix argument at all.)
8497
8498** When a process is deleted, this no longer disconnects the process
8499marker from its buffer position.
8500
8501** The variable garbage-collection-messages now controls whether
8502Emacs displays a message at the beginning and end of garbage collection.
8503The default is nil, meaning there are no messages.
8504
8505** The variable debug-ignored-errors specifies certain kinds of errors
8506that should not enter the debugger. Its value is a list of error
8507condition symbols and/or regular expressions. If the error has any
8508of the condition symbols listed, or if any of the regular expressions
8509matches the error message, then that error does not enter the debugger,
8510regardless of the value of debug-on-error.
8511
8512This variable is initialized to match certain common but uninteresting
8513errors that happen often during editing.
8514
8515** The new function error-message-string converts an error datum
8516into its error message. The error datum is what condition-case
8517puts into the variable, to describe the error that happened.
8518
8519** Anything that changes which buffer appears in a given window
8520now runs the window-scroll-functions for that window.
8521
8522** The new function get-buffer-window-list returns a list of windows displaying
8523a buffer. The function is called with the buffer (a buffer object or a buffer
8524name) and two optional arguments specifying the minibuffer windows and frames
8525to search. Therefore this function takes optional args like next-window etc.,
8526and not get-buffer-window.
8527
8528** buffer-substring now runs the hook buffer-access-fontify-functions,
8529calling each function with two arguments--the range of the buffer
8530being accessed. buffer-substring-no-properties does not call them.
8531
8532If you use this feature, you should set the variable
8533buffer-access-fontified-property to a non-nil symbol, which is a
8534property name. Then, if all the characters in the buffer range have a
8535non-nil value for that property, the buffer-access-fontify-functions
8536are not called. When called, these functions should put a non-nil
8537property on the text that they fontify, so that they won't get called
8538over and over for the same text.
8539
8540** Changes in lisp-mnt.el
8541
8542*** The lisp-mnt package can now recognize file headers that are written
8543in the formats used by the `what' command and the RCS `ident' command:
8544
8545;; @(#) HEADER: text
8546;; $HEADER: text $
8547
8548in addition to the normal
8549
8550;; HEADER: text
8551
8552*** The commands lm-verify and lm-synopsis are now interactive. lm-verify
8553checks that the library file has proper sections and headers, and
8554lm-synopsis extracts first line "synopsis'"information.
8555
8556
a933dad1 8557\f
3787e12e 8558* For older news, see the file ONEWS
a933dad1
DL
8559
8560----------------------------------------------------------------------
8561Copyright information:
8562
424d8b44 8563Copyright (C) 1999, 2000 Free Software Foundation, Inc.
a933dad1
DL
8564
8565 Permission is granted to anyone to make or distribute verbatim copies
8566 of this document as received, in any medium, provided that the
8567 copyright notice and this permission notice are preserved,
8568 thus giving the recipient permission to redistribute in turn.
8569
8570 Permission is granted to distribute modified versions
8571 of this document, or of portions of it,
8572 under the above conditions, provided also that they
8573 carry prominent notices stating who last changed them.
8574\f
8575Local variables:
8576mode: outline
8577paragraph-separate: "[ \f]*$"
8578end: